Preface, Contents
Product Overview 1
Installation and Setup
Guidelines for the C7 2
Special Features of C7 3
Communication between the
CPU and the Operator Panel 4
Communication Functions 5
C7 Digital I/O 6
C7 Analog I/O 7
C7 Universal Inputs 8
Data Set Description, I/O
Parameter Assignment 9
I/O Diagnostics 10
Maintenance 11
Appendices
System Messages A
Technical Specifications
for the C7 B
Guidelines for Handling
Electrostatically-Sensitive
Devices (ESD) C
Literature on SIMATIC S7
and C7 D
Glossary, Index
C7-633 / C7-634
Control Systems
Manual
This manual is part of the
documentation package with the
order number:
6ES7633-1AF01-8BA0
SIMATIC
10/98
C79000-G7076-C634
Release 01
ii
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000 G7076 C634 01
#$.()0'*)/$).)*/$ .2#$#4*0.#*0'*. -1 /* ).0- 4*0-*2)+ -.*)'.! /4.2 ''./*
+-*/ //# +-*0/)*)) / ,0$+( )/# . )*/$ .- #$"#'$"#/ $)/# ()0'42-)$)"
/-$)"' )- (-& .!*''*2.*-$)"/*/# ' 1 '*!)" -
!Warning
$)$/ ./#/ /#. 1 - + -.*)'$)%0-4*-.0./)/$'+-*+ -/4(" )- .0'/$!+-*+ -+- 0/$*).-
)*//& )
Note
-2.4*0-// )/$*)/*+-/$0'-'4$(+*-/)/$)!*-(/$*)*)/# +-*0/#)'$)"/# +-*0/*-/*+-/$0'-
+-/*!/# *0( )//$*)
# 1$ .4./ ((4*)'4 . /0+)*+ -/ $)*)%0)/$*)2$/#/#$.()0'
)'4qualified personnel.#*0' ''*2 /*$)./'')2*-&*)/#$. ,0$+( )/0'$!$ + -.*).
- !$) .+ -.*).2#*- 0/#*-$5 /**(($..$*)/*"-*0))/*/"$-0$/. ,0$+( )/)
.4./ (.$)*-) 2$/# ./'$.# .! /4+-/$ .)./)-.
*/ /# !*''*2$)"
!Warning
#$. 1$ )$/.*(+*) )/.(4*)'4 0. !*-/# ++'$/$*). .-$ $)/# /'*"*-/# / #)$'
.-$+/$*))*)'4$)*)) /$*)2$/# 1$ .*-*(+*) )/.!-*(*/# -()0!/0- -.2#$##1 )
++-*1 *-- *(( ) 4$ ( ).
#$.+-*0/)*)'4!0)/$*)*-- /'4).! '4$!$/$./-).+*-/ ./*- . /0+)$)./'' *-- /'4)
*+ -/ )($)/$) .- *(( )
!Caution
UL + CSA: Lithium Battery Replacement
)" -*! 3+'*.$*)$!// -4$.$)*-- /'4- +' +' *)'42$/#.( *- ,0$1' )//4+
- *(( ) 4/# ()0!/0- -$.+*. *!0. // -$ .*-$)"/*/# ()0!/0- -.$)./-0/$*).
!Warning
FM WARNING
6
R)R)R - - "$./ - /- (-&.*!
#$-+-/$ .0.$)"!*-/# $-*2)+0-+*. .)4*/# -)( .$)/#$.*0( )/2#$#- ! -/*/- (-&.($"#/
$)!-$)" 0+*)/# -$"#/.*!/# /- (-&*2) -.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
precluded entirely , we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,
the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary
corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed.
E Siemens AG 1998
0% //*#)" 2$/#*0/+-$*-)*/$
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright E Siemens AG 1998 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
$ ( ).
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierungssysteme
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft C79000–G7076–C634
Safety Guidelines
Qualified Personnel
Correct Usage
Trademarks
iii
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Preface
This manual provides you with a complete overview of the C7-633 P,
C7-633 DP, C7-634 P and C7-634 DP control systems. It offers support for
the installation and commissioning of these systems, outlines the possibilities
for connecting other devices, and introduces the components required for
this.
This manual is valid for the following device variants:
C7 Order Number
C7-633 P 6ES7633-1DF00-0AE3
C7-633 DP 6ES7633-2BF00-0AE3
C7-634 P 6ES7634-2DBF00-0AE3
C7-634 DP 6ES7634-2BF00-0AE3
This manual is intended for personnel with the necessary qualifications for
commissioning, operating, and programming the hardware product described.
You should be familiar with the use of computers or devices with similar
functions to a PC (for example, programming devices) under the operating
system Windows 95 / NT 4.0 and have some knowledge of the STEP 7
Standard software and the ProTool configuration software and the relevant
documentation.
The control systems comprise the following individual components:
SSIMATIC S7-300
SSIMATIC Operator Panel
You will find information on these individual components in the version of
the C7 documentation package valid for your control systems. This
documentation package comprises four manuals and an instruction list. You
will find the contents listed in Table 1-1:
Purpose of the
Manual
Where is this
Manual Valid?
Audience and
Requirements
C7 Documentation
Package
iv C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
'" " $" "
'
'" " $" "
"&"#$$
!"$ "
%
%
%
#$"%$ #$
%!$ #
"%
T able 1-1 C7 Documentation Package
Manual Contents
Manual
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems Provides information on the topics:
SInstallation and installation guidelines for the C7-633 and C7-634
SConnecting the C7 systems to a programming device and other devices
SConnecting an IM 361 interface module
SFeatures of the C7 and differences from SIMATIC S7-300 and
SIMATIC Operator Panels
SCommunication between the CPU and the OP
Manual
Operator Panel OP7, OP17 Provides information on:
SFunctionality
SDevice description
SOperating modes and how to operate the OP
Manual
S7-300 Programmable
Contr oller, Har dwar e and
Installation
Detailed description of:
SConfiguring the mechanical and electrical structure
SInstallation and wiring
SPreparing the S7-300 for commissioning
SFeatures and technical specifications of the S7-300 CPUs
Reference Manual:
S7-300 and M7-300
Pr ogrammable Contr ollers,
Module Specifications
Describes the hardware of the S7-300 modules:
SAnalog modules
SDigital modules
SInterface modules
SCharacteristics and technical specifications of the S7-300 modules
Instruction List
S7-300 Programmable
Contr oller CPU 312 IFM, 314
IFM, 313, 314, 315-2DP
SList of instructions for the CPUs
SBrief description of the instructions and the execution times
Preface
v
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
There is a range of user manuals which are intended to be used selectively to
support you with the programming, expansion, and configuration of a C7
control system. The figure below and the explanations which follow should
make it easier to use the documentation.
C7
Programming
Assigning Parameters Configuring
ProTool *)
If required
STL for S7-300/S7-400
LAD for S7-300/S7-400
System and Standard
Functions
STEP 7 User Manual
Program Design Manual
ProTool/Lite **)
or
FBD for S7-300/S7-400
Further
Documentation
Preface
vi C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 1-2 STEP 7 Documentation Package, Order Number , see Catalog ST 70
Manual Contents
User Manual:
Standard Software for S7 and
M7
Provides information on working with the STEP 7 applications:
SInstalling and starting up STEP 7 on a PC/programming device
SHandling the applications with the following contents:
– Managing projects and files
– Configuring and assigning parameters to the S7-300
– Assigning symbolic names for user programs
– Creating and debugging the user program in STL/LAD
– Creating data blocks
SConfiguring communications between several CPUs:
– Downloading/uploading, storing, and deleting the user program
– Monitoring and modifying the user program (for example, variables)
– Monitoring and modifying the CPU (for example, operating state, memory
reset, compressing memory, protection levels)
Manual: Statement List (STL) for
S7-300/400,
Programming
or
Manual: Ladder Logic (LAD)
for S7-300/400,
Programming
or
Manual:Function Block
Diagram (FBD) for S7-300/400,
Programming
Reference manuals for programming with STL, LAD, or FBD:
SBasics of working with STL/LAD/FBD
(for example, structure of STL/LAD/FBD, number formats, syntax)
SDescription of all instructions in STEP 7
(with sample programs)
SDescription of the various methods of addressing in STEP 7
(with examples)
SDescription of all integrated functions of the CPUs
SDescription of the CPU-internal registers
Reference Manual
System Software for S7-300/400,
System and Standard Functions
Detailed description of:
SAll organization blocks (OB) and their priority classes
SAll standard functions (FC) integrated in STEP 7
SAll system functions (SFC) integrated in the operating system of a CPU
Programming Manual
System Software for S7-300/400,
Pr ogram Design
Teaches the basic requirements for creating STEP 7 programs:
SGuide to the efficient solution of the programming task using a
PC/programming device and STEP 7
SHow the CPUs work (for example, memory concept, access to inputs/outputs,
addressing, blocks, data types, data management)
SDescription of STEP 7 data management
SUsing the STEP 7 data types
SUsing linear and structured programming (with program samples)
SUsing block call instructions
SOverview of using the STEP 7 applications for developing projects (with
detailed example)
SUsing test and diagnostics functions of the CPUs in the user program
(for example, error OBs, status word)
Preface
vii
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 1-3 Other Manuals that Provide Helpful Information on How to Operate the C7 Control System
Manual Contents
PG 7xx Describes the programming device (PG) hardware:
SSetting up and starting up the programming device
SExpansion possibilities
SConfiguration
SError diagnostics
ProTool / ProTool/Lite Manual for creating configurations with ProT ool or ProT ool/Lite:
SUsing ProTool/ProTool/Lite
SConfiguring
SDisplays and messages
SLoading the configuration into the C7
Manual:
Communication with SIMATIC Describes communication in the SIMATIC S7/M7/C7:
SIntroduction to the theory of communications
SCommunication utilities
SStructure and configuration of communication networks
SExamples of the various communication possibilities
To make it easier to read this manual, we have used C7 throughout the
manual to stand for the device types C7-633 P, C7-633 DP, C7-634 P, and
C7-634 DP.
In the literature list at the end of the manual you will find a list of other
sources of information on S7-300 and programmable logic controllers.
To make it easier for you to locate specific information, the manual has been
structured as follows:
SAt the beginning of the manual, you will find a complete table of contents
for the manual.
SIn the individual chapters, the information in the left margin gives an
overview of the contents of each section.
SFollowing the appendices, there is a glossary containing definitions of the
important technical terms used in the manual.
SAt the end of the manual, you will find a detailed index giving you fast
access to the information you seek.
The C7 control system conforms to the standards listed in Appendix B.1.
Conventions
Other Sources of
Information
Structure of This
Manual
Standards
Preface
viii C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
If you have any questions about using the C7 control systems described in
this manual and cannot find an answer here, please contact the Siemens
representative in your area. You can obtain a list of addresses of Siemens
representatives worldwide from the SIMATIC Customer Support Hotline.
If you have any questions or comments on this manual, please fill out the
remarks form at the end of the manual and return it to the address shown on
the form. We would be grateful if you could also take the time to answer the
questions giving your personal opinion of the manual.
Further Support
Preface
ix
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Open round the clock, world-wide:
Johnson City
Nuremberg
Singapore
SIMATIC Basic Hotline
Nuremberg
SIMATIC BASIC Hotline Johnson City
SIMATIC BASIC Hotline Singapore
SIMATIC BASIC Hotline
Local time:Mo.-Fr. 7:00 to 19:00
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7000
Fax: +49 (911) 895-7002
E-Mail: simatic.support@
nbgm.siemens.de
GMT: +1:00
Local time:Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00
Phone: +1 423 461-2522
Fax: +1 423 461-2231
E-Mail: simatic.hotline@
sea.siemens.com
GMT: -5:00
Local time:Mo.-Fr. 8:30 to 17:30
Phone: +65 740-7000
Fax: +65 740-7001
E-Mail: simatic@
singnet.com.sg
GMT: +8:00
SIMATIC Premium Hotline
(Calls charged, only with
SIMATIC Card)
Time: Mo.-Fr. 0:00 to 24:00
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7777
Fax: +49 (911) 895-7001
GMT: +01:00
The SIMATIC Customer Support team provides you with comprehensive
additional information on SIMATIC products via its online services:
SYou can obtain general current information:
–On the Internet under
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic/html_00/simatic
.htm
–Using fax polling no. 08765-93 02 77 95 00
SCurrent Product Information leaflets and downloads which you may find
useful for your product are available:
–On the Internet under
http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html-00/
–Via the Bulletin Board System (BBS) in Nuremberg (SIMATIC
Customer Support Mailbox) under the number +49 (911) 895-7100.
To access the mailbox, use a modem with V.34 (28.8 Kbps) capability
whose parameters you should set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial in
using ISDN (x.75, 64 Kbps).
SIMATIC Customer
Support Hotline
SIMATIC Customer
Support Online
Services
Preface
xC7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Preface
xi
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Contents
Preface iii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Product Overview 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Product Variants 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Scope of Supply and Accessories for C7 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Components for Connection to a C7 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C7 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Labeling Strips 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Mechanical Installation 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Electrical Installation 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Connector Assignments 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to a C7 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to Several Nodes 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Setup Guidelines for Interference-Free Installation 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Connecting Shielded Cables 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Encoding Connectors 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10 Expanding the C7 with S7-300 Modules 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11 Configuring an MPI and PROFIBUS DP Network 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Special Features of C7 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Variations from the Individual Components CPU and OP 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Selecting a C7 CPU Operating Mode 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 DI/DO Status Displays 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Status and Error Indicators on the C7 CPU 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Configured Communications Parameters 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Overview of User Data Areas 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Event and Alarm Messages 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Keyboard and LED Image 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 System Keyboard Image 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Function Keyboard Image 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 LED Image 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.5 Screen Number Area 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 User Version 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 Interface Area 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1 Control and Checkback Bits 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 Data Areas in the Interface Area 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 Recipes 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 Transferring Data Records 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records, and the Requisite
Data Areas 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3 Synchronization during Transfer - Normal Case 4-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.4 Synchronization during Transfer - Special Cases 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 Notes on Optimization 4-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 Control Jobs and Their Parameters 4-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 Example of How to Activate a Control Job 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Communication Functions 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Communication between C7/S7 Stations (MPI Subnet) 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Communication within a C7 Station (PROFIBUS DP or IM) 5-5. . . . . . . . . . .
6 C7 Digital I/O 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Digital Inputs 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Digital Outputs 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 DI/DO Status Displays 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Addressing the C7 I/O 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 C7 Analog I/O 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Analog Technology 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Connecting Transducers to Analog Inputs 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Connecting Voltage and Current Transducers 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Analog Input Function 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Characteristics and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Module 7-11
7.5 Analog Output Function 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Use and Function of the C7 Analog I/O 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.1 Addressing the Analog I/O 7-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 Timing of the Analog I/Os 7-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.3 Assigning Parameters to the Analog I/O 7-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.4 Representation of Analog Values 7-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.5 Representation of Analog Values for the Measurement Ranges
of the Analog Inputs 7-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.6 Representation of Analog Values for the Output Range
of the Analog Outputs 7-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.7 Conversion and Cycle Time of the Analog Inputs 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.8 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of Analog Outputs 7-32. . .
Contents
xiii
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.9 Behavior of the Analog I/O 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.10 Time Interrupt/Interrupt Cycle 7-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Examples for Programming the Analog I/O 7-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.1 Block for Scaling Analog Input Values 7-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.2 Block for Scaling Analog Output Values 7-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 C7 Universal Inputs 8-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Universal Inputs 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Use and Function of the Universal Inputs 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Addressing Universal Inputs 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Assigning Parameters to the Universal Inputs 8-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Interrupt Inputs and Counter Interrupts 8-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 Counters 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 Frequency Counters 8-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.6 Period Time Measurement 8-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.7 External Gate Counter 8-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Example for Programming the Counters 8-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Data Set Description, I/O Parameter Assignment 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Data Set Description for Parameter Block of C7 Analog I/O
and Universal Inputs 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 I/O Diagnostics 10-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Diagnostic Messages 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Diagnostic Data of the C7 Analog I/O and Universal Inputs 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Dependencies and Reactions of the Diagnostic Evaluation 10-8. . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Maintenance 11-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 Changing the Backup Battery 11-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Replacing the C7 11-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A System Messages A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Technical Specifications for the C7 B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 Technical Specifications B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 Notes on the CE Marking B-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 Notes for Machine Manufacturers B-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4 Transport and Storage Conditions for Backup Batteries B-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices (ESD) C-1. . . . . . . . .
C.1 What is ESD? C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 Electrostatic Charging of Objects and Persons C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 General Protective Measures against Electrostatic Discharge Damage C-4.
C.4 Taking Measurements and Working on ESD Modules C-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.5 Packing Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices C-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xiv C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
D Literature on SIMATIC C7 and S7 D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary Glossary-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
1-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Product Overview
This chapter introduces the different variants of the device. A brief overview
of the scope of functions of the device helps to give you a first impression of
the C7 control systems.
In addition, this chapter also explains which other components you can
connect to a C7 control system.
To operate a C7 control system you will require the following accessories:
SProgramming device (PG) or PC with multipoint interface (MPI),
SAn MPI cable
SA serial cable (RS 232/TTY),
SA 24-V power supply
SThe following programs must be loaded on the programming device or
PC:
– The STEP 7 or STEP 7-Mini applications
– The configuration tool ProTool or ProTool/Lite
In This Chapter...
Accessories for
Operating a C7
Control System
1
1-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
1.1 Product Variants
The C7 devices are available in the following variants:
SC7-633 P, C7-633 DP
SC7-634 P, C7-634-DP
The C7-633 and C7-633 DP control systems have a SIMATIC S7-300
CPU 315 or CPU 315-2 DP as the C7 CPU and an OP 7 with extended
function keys as the C7 OP (see Section 3.1).
The screen display comprises four lines of 20 characters with a character
height of 8 mm.
The C7-633 P is fitted with an integrated I/O module and has no DP
interface.
Figure 1-1 C7-633 P
The C7-633 DP does not have an integrated on-board I/O.
Figure 1-2 C7-633 DP
Overview
C7-633 P/
C7-633 DP
Product Overview
1-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The C7-634 P and C7-634 DP control systems have a SIMATIC S7-300
CPU 315 or CPU 315-2 DP as the C7 CPU and an OP 17 as the C7 OP.
The screen display can be configured as follows:
SFour lines of 20 characters with 11 mm character height or
SEight lines of 40 characters with 6 mm character height.
The different character heights can also be combined with the basic
configuration of 8*40 in a display.
The C7-634 P is fitted with an integrated I/O module and has no DP
interface.
Figure 1-3 C7-634 P
The C7-634 DP has no integrated on-board I/O.
Figure 1-4 C7-634 DP
C7-634 P/
C7-634 DP
Product Overview
1-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The C7-633 DP and C7-634 DP control systems can be connected via the
integrated DP interface to a PROFIBUS DP network.
With the C7 devices you can:
SDownload user programs to the C7 CPU and run them.
SCommunicate with other nodes in an MPI or PROFIBUS DP network via
an integrated MPI or DP interface.
SProcess digital and analog signals using the C7’s integral I/O.
SUse interrupt inputs or counters (for purposes including frequency
metering, period duration measurement).
SLoad and execute operator interface configurations you created with the
configuration tools “ProTool” or “ProTool/Lite.”
SUsing these configurations you can monitor and influence the process
which you control with the user program.
SConnect other S7 modules via the IM 361 interface module.
SOutput data to a connected printer.
The C7 contains two units that work independently of each other and
communicate via an internal multipoint interface:
SC7 CPU: controls
SC7 Operator Panel: operates and monitors
The C7 CPU is independent of the C7 OP. The C7 OP continues to run, for
example, when the C7 CPU goes into STOP.
Note
The C7 CPU and the C7 OP each have an MPI address. You therefore
configure these components exactly the same as the stand-alone components
CPU and OP.
These components are discussed explicitly in the manual as necessary.
PROFIBUS DP Bus
Connection
Scope of
Functions
C7 Components
Product Overview
1-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
1.2 Scope of Supply and Accessories for C7
The following components are included in the scope of supply of a C7
device:
SC7-633 P, C7-633 DP, C7-634 P, or C7-634 DP
SBattery (integrated in the device)
SOne grounding bar (C7-633 P and C7-634 P only)
SSix shielding clips (C7-633 P and C7-634 P only)
SSeal and four screw-in tensioners
SPower supply connector (4-pin)
SProduct Information (as required)
SConnector set (C7-633 P and C7-634 P only)
The following components can be ordered as important C7 standard
accessories:
Component Identifying Data Order Number
PG cable (MPI)
(connects C7 to PG) See catalog ST 70
PG cable (TTY)
(serial transfer (ProTool))
PC/MPI cable 5 m
Printer cable
for RS 232 serial interface
(max. 16 m)
The following components can be ordered as spare parts for the C7:
Component Identifying Data Order Number
Service package Seal and 4 screw-in
tensioners See catalog ST 70
Backup battery
Connector set for C7 I/Os
with solid and profiled
coding keys
Parts Supplied
Accessories
Spare Parts
Product Overview
1-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
1.3 Components for Connection to a C7
In addition to the connections to the process, you can also connect different
components to the C7. The most important components and their functions
are listed in Table 1-1:
Table 1-1 Connectable Components of a C7
Component Function Illustration
Interface module (IM 361) ... connects a C7 to an expansion
rack for S7-300 modules via an
IM 361 connecting cable
Signal modules (SM)
(digital input modules,
digital output modules,
analog input modules,
analog output modules,
analog I/O modules)
... adapt different process signal
levels to the C7 CPU. They can be
connected to the C7 via an IM 361
Function modules (FM) ... for time-critical and
memory-intensive process signal
processing tasks, for example,
positioning or closed-loop control
Communications processors (CP) ... relieves the CPU of
communication tasks, for example,
CP 342-5 DP for supporting FMS
services, point-to-point connections,
S5 connections, etc.
S7-300 (CPU) ... communicates via the MPI/DP
interface with the C7 and/or other
nodes in an MPI network
S7-400 (CPU) ... communicates via the MPI/DP
interface with the C7 and/or other
nodes in an MPI/DP network
Product Overview
1-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 1-1 Connectable Components of a C7
Component IllustrationFunction
C7 I/O module
(expansion I/Os) ... is used for expanding the
integrated I/Os by 16 digital inputs,
16 digital outputs, 4 analog inputs, 4
analog outputs, and 4 universal
inputs directly on the device
C7 simulator modules ... with switches and LEDs to allow
simulation of 16 digital inputs and 16
digital outputs. It can be connected to
the C7 via an IM 361
LEDs
SIMATIC TOP Connect ... permits easy , fast, and reliable
wiring of the I/O and power supply
connectors
OP (operator panel) ... executes operator interface
functions
PROFIBUS bus cable with bus
connector ... connects nodes of an MPI network
or L2-DP network together
Programming device cable (MPI) ... connects a programming
device/PC to a C7
Programming device cable (serial) ... connects a programming
device/PC to a C7 (RS 232/TTY).
Serial transfer with ProT ool
Printer ... prints out operator interface
messages for the C7
Product Overview
1-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 1-1 Connectable Components of a C7
Component IllustrationFunction
Programming device (PG) or PC
with the STEP 7 and ProTool
software packages
... configures, assigns parameters,
programs, and tests the C7
RS 485 repeater ... for amplifying the signals in an
MPI network or L2-DP network, and
for linking segments of an MPI or
L2-DP network
Product Overview
1-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 1-5 shows some possible connections to other devices.
IM 361
C7
S7-300 modules S7-300 CPU
PG
Printer
OP 25
PROFIBUS DP connection
MPI
RS 232 (V.24)/TTY
IM 361
ET 200 M with,
e.g. FM 355
Á
Â
Ã
À
À
Á
Â
Ã
Figure 1-5 Some C7 Connection Possibilities
Example
Product Overview
1-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Product Overview
2-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Installation and Setup Guidelines
for the C7
Section Description Page
2.1 Labeling Strips 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Installation 2-5
2.3 Electrical Installation 2-9
2.4 Connector Assignments 2-13
2.5 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to a C7 2-17
2.6 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to Several Nodes 2-18
2.7 Setup Guidelines for Interference-Free Installation 2-20
2.8 Connecting Shielded Cables 2-22
2.9 Encoding Connectors 2-23
2.10 Expanding the C7 with S7-300 Modules 2-24
2.11 Configuring an MPI and PROFIBUS DP Network 2-26
Chapter
Overview
2
2-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.1 Labeling Strips
The function keys are labeled using labeling strips which are inserted into the
keypad from the side. When shipped, the function keys are labeled as
follows:
SC7-633: F1 to F4, K1 to K8, and K9 to K16.
SC7-634: F1 to F8, K1 to K8, and K9 to K16.
By exchanging the labeling strips, you can label the function keys of your C7
specifically for your plant.
To make your own labeling strips, use transparent foil so that the LEDs in the
function keys remain visible. Label the foil using either a printer or an
indelible pen so it cannot be erased. Cut the strips out using the templates
shown in Figures 2-1 (C7-633) and 2-2 (C7-634).
Note
Laser printouts are not indelible. You should therefore protect the printed
sheet with transparent adhesive foil.
Shipped with the ProTool configuration software are the WordR files
SLIDE633.DOC and SLIDE634.DOC. The files contain formatted
templates for labeling the function keys of C7-633 and C7-634 and can also
be used to edit and print your own individual labeling strips with a minimum
of effort. You will find the SLIDE63x.DOC and SLIDE634.DOC files in
the ProTool directory “Utility.”
Plant-Specific
Labeling
Making Labeling
Strips
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Key surface can be labeledTransparent LED window
Figure 2-1 Dimensions of the Labeling Strips for the C7-633
Key surface can be labeledTransparent LED window
Figure 2-2 Dimensions of the Labeling Strips for the C7-634
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The C7 is designed for user-friendly insertion of the labeling strips. The
labeling strips should only be changed when the C7 is not installed. Proceed
as follows to change the strips:
1. Pull the labeling strips you want to replace out of the device.
2. From the rear of the device, push the new strips into the relevant slots on
the side.
Note
The labels on the strips must be indelible before the strips are inserted. If the
keypad membrane is dirtied or smudged from the inside, it cannot be cleaned
and can only be replaced at the factory of origin.
Labeling strips
Figure 2-3 Inserting Labeling Strips
Changing Labeling
Strips
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.2 Mechanical Installation
The C7 control system has been prepared for fixed installation in a control
panel or cabinet door. Proceed as follows to install the C7:
1. Make a cutout in the control panel dimensions 230.5 x 158.5 mm (same
size for all device variants). See Figure 2-5.
2. Push the enclosed seal over the casing from behind.
3. Insert the C7 into the prepared cutout.
4. Guide the fixing hooks of the enclosed screw-in tensioner 1 into the
appropriate recesses in the casing of the C7.
5. Tighten the C7 using a screwdriver from the rear of the control panel 2.
Control panel
2
1
Figure 2-4 C7-633 DP with Screw-In Tensioners
Installing the
Device
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
203.5
240
230.5+0.5
158.5+0.5
Cutout in front panel
Figure 2-5 Dimension Drawings for Cutout in Control Panel (All Device Variants)
When installing a C7, please note the following:
The plate of a control panel may be 2 to 4 mm thick. Make sure the seal
ring fits tightly in all places.
When you tighten the fixings, the seal ring should be visible
(min. 0.5 mm).
Gaps of at least 50 and 70 mm must be left on the sides of the C7 for
outgoing cables and air circulation as shown in Figure 2-6.
The seal ring on the front panel must sit perfectly.
The tabs of the insertion strips must not be trapped.
The C7 must be protected from direct sunlight.
Note
The C7 can be mounted and operated in different positions, whereby
horizontal mounting is preferable.
It is also possible to mount the system rotated around a horizontal axis (see
Appendix B.1 Technical Specifications “Operational ambient temperature”).
Operation is not permissible in a position that is tilted around a vertical axis.
Installation
Guidelines
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
50
15
70 70
Horizontal axis
Figure 2-6 Gap Dimensions to be Observed when Installing the C7
26.9
41.5
24.7
42.1
42.6
44
69
158
74.4 6.2
5
40.9
33
26.9
56.1
230
Figure 2-7 Dimension Drawings for the C7-633 DP/C7-634 DP
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
26.9
42.6
44.146
56.5
65
69
71.35
33
40.9
26.9
71.1
6.2
89.4
5
158
67.486
51.619.5
230
Figure 2-8 Dimension Drawings for the C7-633 P/C7-634 P
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.3 Electrical Installation
The following plug and socket connectors (interfaces) required for
connecting the various inputs and outputs of the on-board I/O of the
C7-633 P or C7-634 P are provided.
AUX Digital Input (X10)
Analog Output (X13)
Digital Input (X12)
Digital Output (X11)
DI/DO-24V DC Power Supply
(X10)
Analog Input (X14)
Figure 2-9 A V iew of the C7-633 P with On-Board I/O Interfaces
Table 2-1 Pin Assignments of the Digital Inputs
Pin No. Signal Explanation
0.0 I0.0 Digital input 0
0.1 I0.1 Digital input 1
0.2 I0.2 Digital input 2
0.3 I0.3 Digital input 3
0.4 I0.4 Digital input 4
0.5 I0.5 Digital input 5
0.6 I0.6 Digital input 6
0.7 I0.7 Digital input 7
1.0 I1.0 Digital input 8
1.1 I1.1 Digital input 9
1.2 I1.2 Digital input 10
1.3 I1.3 Digital input 11
Overview
Digital Inputs (X12)
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 2-1 Pin Assignments of the Digital Inputs
Pin No. ExplanationSignal
1.4 I1.4 Digital input 12
1.5 I1.5 Digital input 13
1.6 I1.6 Digital input 14
1.7 I1.7 Digital input 15
Table 2-2 Pin Assignments of the Digital Outputs
Pin No. Signal Explanation
0.0 Q0.0 Digital output 0
0.1 Q0.1 Digital output 1
0.2 Q0.2 Digital output 2
0.3 Q0.3 Digital output 3
0.4 Q0.4 Digital output 4
0.5 Q0.5 Digital output 5
0.6 Q0.6 Digital output 6
0.7 Q0.7 Digital output 7
1.0 Q1.0 Digital output 8
1.1 Q1.1 Digital output 9
1.2 Q1.2 Digital output 10
1.3 Q1.3 Digital output 11
1.4 Q1.4 Digital output 12
1.5 Q1.5 Digital output 13
1.6 Q1.6 Digital output 14
1.7 Q1.7 Digital output 15
Digital Outputs
(X11)
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 2-3 Pin Assignments of the Analog Inputs
Pin No. Explanation
AI1-U Analog input 1, signal input for voltage
AI1-I Analog input 1, signal input for current
AI1-M Analog input 1, reference potential
AI2-U Analog input 2, signal input for voltage
AI2-I Analog input 2, signal input for current
AI2-M Analog input 2, reference potential
AI3-U Analog input 3, signal input for voltage
AI3-I Analog input 3, signal input for current
AI3-M Analog input 3, reference potential
AI4-U Analog input 4, signal input for voltage
AI4-I Analog input 4, signal input for current
–Not connected
–Not connected
–Not connected
Table 2-4 Pin Assignments of the Analog Outputs
Pin No. Explanation
AO1 Analog output, signal output for voltage/current
MANA Analog output, reference potential
AO2 Analog output, signal output for voltage/current
MANA Analog output, reference potential
AO3 Analog output, signal output for voltage/current
MANA Analog output, reference potential
AO4 Analog output, signal output for voltage/current
MANA Analog output, reference potential
Analog Inputs X14
Analog Outputs
X13
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 2-5 Pin Assignments of the Universal Inputs
Pin No. Explanation
MRelevant ground
DI-X1 Universal input 1 (digital input, interrupt input or counter input)
DI-X2 Universal input 2 (digital input, interrupt input or counter input)
DI-X3 Universal input 3 (digital input, interrupt frequency or period duration
counter input)
DI-X4 Universal input 4 (interrupt input or digital input)
Gate1 Gate for counter input DI-X1
Gate2 Gate for counter input DI-X2
Gate3 Gate for counter input DI-X3
Table 2-6 Pin Assignments of the Power Supply DI/DO
Pin No. Explanation
1L+ 24-volt supply for DI 0.0...1.7
1M Relevant ground for DI 0.0...1.7
2L+ 24-volt supply for DO0.0...DO0.7 (approx. 2 A)
2L+ 24-volt supply for DO0.0...DO0.7 (approx. 2 A)
2M Relevant ground for DO0.0...DO0.7
3L+ 24-volt supply für DO1.0...DO1.7 (approx. 2 A)
3L+ 24-volt supply for DO1.0...DO1.7 (approx. 2 A)
3M Relevant ground for DO1.0...DO1.7
AUX Digital Inputs
X10 (Universal
Inputs)
DI/DO 24 VDC X10
Power Supply
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.4 Connector Assignments
The following interfaces and connectors are present on the C7 for connecting
it to other devices. The connector assignments are listed in the following
tables.
RS 232/TTY
serial interface
(X2)
Input 24 VDC
Author (X1)
Functional
ground
Figure 2-10 C7-633 DP and C7-634 DP: View with Power Supply and RS 232/TTY
Serial Interface
Pin No. Explanation
1 L+
2M (ground M24V)
3A+ (authorization input)
4AI ground (authorization input)
Note
When connecting the power supply, observe the information on the 24 V DC
power supply listed in the Technical Specifications in Appendix B.1
Overview
24 VDC Input X1
(C7 Power
Supply)
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Pin No. Explanation
1C7 ground (reference potential)
2 DRxM
3 RxD
4 TxD
5 CTS
6 DTxP
7 DTxM
8C7 ground (reference potential)
9 DRxP
10 RTS
11 --
12 C7 ground (reference potential)
13 --
14 --
15 C7 ground (reference potential)
Connect the functional ground terminal (see Figure 2-10) to the cabinet
ground using a cable lug and a cable with a minimum cross-section of
4 mm2, taking the shortest route.
MPI
(X3)
IM
(X5)
Memory Card
(X6)
Analog Input (X14)
Analog Output (X13)
Figure 2-11 C7-633 P and C7-634 P: V iew with IM, MPI Interface, Memory Card,
and I/O Interface
RS 232/TTY (X2)
Serial Interface
Functional Ground
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-15
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
MPI
(X3)
PROFIBUS DP
(X4)
IM
(X5)
Memory Card
(X6)
Figure 2-12 C7-633 DP and C7-634 DP: V iew with IM, MPI, and DP Interfaces, and
Memory Card
Pin No. Explanation
1 NC
2 M24V
3RS485 line B
4 RTSAS
5 M5V
6 P5V
7 P24V
8RS485 line A
9 NC
MPI Interface
(X3) and
PROFIBUS DP
Interface (X4)
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-16 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
You can use the following cables to connect the C7 to other devices:
Table 2-7 Cables for Connecting to the C7 (see also Section 1.2)
Connecting Cable Length Special Features Illustration Connection
between...
MPI
Programming device cable 5 m - C7 ´ PG/PC
PROFIBUS bus cable
Interior cable,
Direct-buried cable
and bus connector,
without PG-type socket,
with PG-type socket
and PROFIBUS bus terminal RS 485,
with 1.5 m, with 3 m cable,
with PG-type socket and 1.5 m cable
-User must make
own cable C7 ´ PG/PC
C7 ´ C7
C7 ´ S7-300
C7 ´ S7-400
RS 232/TTY serial interface
Serial cable (printer cable) See catalog
ST80.1 C7 ³ Printer
Serial cable (transfer ProT ool) See catalog
ST80.1 C7 ´ PG/PC
IM 361
IM 361 cable - C7 ´ additional
I/O (S7-300)
C7 Device
Connections
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-17
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.5 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to a C7
You can connect the programming device or a PC to the multipoint interface
(MPI) of the C7 using a preassembled programming device cable.
Alternatively , you can make up the connecting cable yourself using the
PROFIBUS bus cable and bus connectors.
Figure 2-13 shows the components required for connecting a programming
device/PC to a C7.
Programming device cable (MPI)
PG/PC
C7
Programming device
cable (RS 232/TTY)
Figure 2-13 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to a C7
The C7 operator panel is loaded via the RS 232/TTY interface. The
connection to the C7 CPU is made via the multipoint interface.
You will find information on the possible cable lengths and what you should
observe when setting up an MPI or PROFIBUS DP network in the manual
/10/.
Procedure
Cable Lengths
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-18 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.6 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to Several Nodes
When you connect a programming device or a PC to several nodes, you must
differentiate between two types of configuration:
Fixed installation of the programming device or PC in the MPI network
A programming device or PC connected for startup and maintenance
purposes.
Depending on the type you require, connect the programming device or PC
to the other nodes as follows:
Configuration Type Connection
Fixed installation of the programming
device/PC in the network The programming device/PC is linked
directly into the MPI network
Programming device/PC connected for
startup and maintenance The programming device/PC is connected
to one node via a spur line
With fixed installation of a programming device or PC in the MPI network,
you connect the programming device/PC via bus connectors directly to the
other nodes in the MPI network.
Figure 2-14 shows a C7 network with two C7s. The C7 devices are connected
together by means of a PROFIBUS bus cable.
C7 PG/PC
PROFIBUS bus cable
C7 MPI
Figure 2-14 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to Several C7 Devices
Overview
Fixed Installation
of Programming
Device/PC
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-19
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
If there is no stationary programming device or PC available, we recommend
the following procedure:
In order to connect a programming device or PC for service purposes to an
MPI network with “unknown” node addresses, we recommend you set the
following address on the service programming device/PC:
MPI address: 0
Highest MPI address: 126.
Then work out the highest MPI address in the MPI network using the STEP 7
application Configuring Hardware and adjust the highest MPI address on the
programming device or PC to match the highest address of the MPI network.
For startup and maintenance purposes, you connect the programming
device/PC via a spur line to a node in the MPI network. To do this, the bus
connector of this node must have a PG-type socket.
Figure 2-15 shows two networked C7s to which a programming device/PC is
connected.
PROFIBUS bus cable
PG cable
= spur line
C7
PG/PC
C7
Figure 2-15 Connecting a Programming Device/PC to an MPI Network
Connecting a
Programming
Device/PC for
Service Purposes
Programming
Device/PC for
Startup and
Maintenance
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-20 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.7 Setup Guidelines for Interference-Free Installation
An automation system must be shielded to prevent interference.
When a system is poorly grounded or not shielded, low-frequency or
high-frequency interference signals can penetrate through to the internal bus
of the controller and cause malfunctions.
Interference signals can also be caused when relays or contactors switch
(very rapid changes in current or voltage; high-frequency interference
signals) or when two parts of a system have different grounding potentials
(low-frequency interference signals).
Use only shielded cables for all signal lines.
Ground cable shields on both sides for:
– Cables to the programmable controller
– Bus cables
– Cables to I/O devices.
The standard cables specified in the ST80.1 catalog meet these
requirements.
Screw or lock all plug-type connections.
Do not install signal lines parallel to power lines. Use a separate cable
duct located at least 50 cm from the power lines.
Devices which could bring in interference signals from outside should be
installed at the bottom of the cabinet. Place the grounding rail immediately at
the cabinet entrance so that cables which could be carrying interference
signals can be placed directly on the grounding potential. Place all shielded
lines with their shielding here. With double-shielded signal lines, place only
the outer shield on the grounding potential.
Install long signal lines along the cabinet walls. Cabinet design in accordance
with EMC guidelines is an important factor in the reduction of interference.
All grounding connections in the cabinet must have large cable cross-sections
and be laid over a large area.
Insulate analog devices in the switching cabinet and ground them to a single
point in the cabinet using copper tape.
Always use equivalent metals for the materials. Never use aluminum (danger
of oxidation).
Overview
Use and
Installation of
Interference-Free
Cables
Cabinet
Installation
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-21
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Connect all doors and metal parts (sides, back panel, and cover) of the
cabinet at least three times to the cabinet frame (short, paint-free, and
large-area connections).
Note
If your system generates high electrostatic voltages (for example, textile
machines, special construction machines), run the grounding lines of the
machine parts carrying interference signals to a separate operating ground
isolated from the central grounding point of the cabinet (surface grounding
with building construction, reinforcement).
Observe the guidelines in Section 4.11 of the manual /10/ to protect against
overvoltage and lightning strikes.
Observe the guidelines in Section 4.8 of the manual /10/ for laying cables
within buildings.
Protection Against
Overvoltage
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-22 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.8 Connecting Shielded Cables
This section describes how to connect the shield of shielded signal lines to
ground. The ground connection is made by directly connecting the shield
with the ground terminal of the C7-633 P or C7-634 P.
Proceed as follows to install the grounding bar and shielding clips supplied
with the C7-633 P and C7-634 P:
1. Position the grounding bar as shown in Figure 2-16 and fix this in place
with the screw you removed earlier.
2. Attach the shielding clips to the grounding bar as shown in Figure 2-16.
3. Press the insulated cable into these shielding clips in such a way as to
achieve optimal contact of the cable shield.
Shielding clip
Scale 1:1
Figure 2-16 C7-633 P with Grounding Bar and Shielding Clips
Overview
Procedure
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-23
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.9 Encoding Connectors
A set of connectors with solid and profiled coding keys can be ordered as
C7-633 P or C7-634 P accessories (see Section 1.2 under Accessories). The
keying of connectors will be described in the following:
The solid coding keys À and profiled coding keys Á (see Figure 2-17)
prevent a connector from being confused with another without polarity
reversal.
Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the solid coding key À into the notches provided on the connector
part ¶.
2. Insert the profiled coding key Á into the respective cutouts on the housing
part ·.
Solid and profiled coding keys that face each other prevent the connector
from being plugged in.
The connector can be plugged in if solid and profiled coding keys do not face
each other.
12345678910
À
¶
·
Á
Figure 2-17 The Coding Ensures that the Correct Connector is Inserted
Overview
Keying
Connectors
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-24 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.10 Expanding the C7 with S7-300 Modules
The C7 has an integrated IM 360 interface module for I/O expansion with an
external S7 standard I/O. This interface module has the following
characteristics:
Data transmission from the IM 360 to the IM 361 of the first rack
expansion via a 368 connecting cable
Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m.
You can expand your C7 by up to three racks using the integrated IM 360
interface module.
You can connect the additional modules as follows:
1. Install the modules as described for racks 1 to 3 in the manual /10/.
2. Connect the C7 to the IM 361 via a standard IM cable (see also
Figure 2-12 for connecting the C7).
When the C7 is first started up, it detects any additional connected modules.
IM 360 Interface
Module
Connecting
Additional
Modules
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-25
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
368 connecting cable
368 connecting cable
368 connecting cable
2 3 4*) 5*)
34567891011
34567891011
Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Slot number
Slot number
Slot number
Rack 2
IM-361
IM-361
IM-361
Rack 1
Rack 3
*) only for C7-63x P
Figure 2-18 Maximum Configuration of the Slots of a C7
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
2-26 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
2.11 Configuring an MPI and PROFIBUS DP Network
You can integrate the C7 devices in an MPI network via the MPI and
configure a PROFIBUS DP network via the PROFIBUS DP interface (only
for C7-633 DP or C7-634 DP).
You will find the procedures for configuring an MPI network and
PROFIBUS DP network in the manual /10/.
Installation and Setup Guidelines for the C
7
3-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
3.1 Variations from the Individual Components CPU and OP
The arrangement and color of the keys on the C7-633 and C7-634
corresponds mainly to those of the OP 7 and OP 17 operator panels (see the
OP7, OP17 Control Panels manual).
Extended OP function keys on the C7-633:
The C7-633 and the OP 7 differ in their number of function keys:
C7-633: F1 to F4 and K1 to K16
OP 7: F1 to F4 and K1 to K4
A CPU is set to the modes MRES, STOP, RUN, and RUN-P using a
mechanical keyswitch. On both C7 devices, this keyswitch is emulated as an
electronic keyswitch by means of the keys and .
SIMATIC C7-633
F1 F2 F3 F4
FRCE
SF
BATF
DC5V
STOP
RUN
SF–IM
BUSF
SF–DP
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
8978970
456
DEF
.
123
ABC SHIFT INS
DEL HELP
ACK
ESC
ENTER
R–P
R
S
M
:,-'A
,E./
Function keys
Numeric keys System keys
CPU operating mode
selection keys
SoftkeysC7 CPU
status LEDs
System key
LEDs
Figure 3-1 C7-633 with Keyboard and Display
Keyboard
Selecting a CPU
Operating Mode
Using Keys
Special Features of C7
3-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
All other keys are
identical to those of
the C7-633
SIMATIC C7-634
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
Figure 3-2 C7-634 with Keyboard and Display
Special Features of C7
3-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
3.2 Selecting a C7 CPU Operating Mode
You select the CPU operating modes RUN-P, RUN, STOP, and MRES as
follows:
Each time the mode selector key is pressed, the CPU mode changes. The key
must remain pressed for at least 500 ms for the mode change to take place
and the corresponding LED to light up.
To prevent an uncontrolled C7 CPU operating mode transition during control
operation, the key function can be activated or deactivated via an external
authorization input. When the authorization input is activated, operating
mode selection is active and the current CPU mode is displayed by an LED.
When the authorization input is deactivated, all status LEDs are off.
The authorization input is located on the same connector as the C7 power
supply (see Section 2.4).
Authorization activated: A+
AI
bridged
Authorization deactivated: A+
AI
open
Changing the
C7 CPU Operating
Mode
Special Features of C7
3-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Mode Key Explanation / Procedure
RUN-P
(R-P)
The C7 CPU processes the user program.
Programs and data can be:
SRead out from the C7 CPU with the
programming device (C7 ³ PG)
SDownloaded to the C7 CPU and changed
there (PG ³ C7).
RUN
(R) or
The C7 CPU processes the user program.
Programs and data can be:
SRead out from the C7 CPU with the
programming device (C7 ³ PG).
Scannot be downloaded to the C7 CPU and
changed there (PG ³ C7).
STOP
(S)
The C7 CPU does not process the user
program.
Programs can be:
SRead out from the C7 CPU with the
programming device (C7 ³ PG)
SDownloaded to the C7 CPU and changed
there (PG ³ C7).
Note:
The STOP mode is only valid for the C7 CPU
and not for the C7 OP. It is possible to continue
working with the C7 OP.
MRES
(M)
Memory Reset
Executing a memory reset on the C7 CPU
(clear memory, reload user program from flash
memory if a memory card is inserted) requires a
special sequence of operations with the modes
STOP and MRES:
1. Select STOP mode by pressing the DOWN
key . The key must remain pressed for at
least 300 ms for the transition to take place.
The key LED “S” and the CPU status LED
“ST OP” light up.
2. Select the mode MRES by keeping the
DOWN key depressed. The key LED “M”
lights up. Immediately after the second time
the CPU status LED “STOP” lights up,
release the key briefly and press it again.
After flashing briefly , it then remains lit.
Note:
If data were deleted during the memory reset
which were required by the C7 OP
configuration, the C7 OP reports this using an
error message.
Special Features of C7
3-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
3.3 DI/DO Status Displays
The DI/DO status display is not a system function but a configured image of
the C7 OP. You can create the DI/DO status display image yourself or copy it
from the standard configuration supplied with ProTool (image name:
Z_DI_DO).
The values represented are read as a direct process image of the digital
inputs and an internal process image of the digital outputs of the digital
C7 I/O and displayed in binary format (BIN).
Note that the last state set by the program is displayed, although the real
process state of the digital outputs is 0 when the C7 CPU is in STOP mode.
The following data are supplied:
= Anwahl der
10101010 1.7-1.0
DI:11101110 0.7-0.0
DO:11101110 0.7-0.0
10101010 1.7-1.0
ÀÁ
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 3-3 DI/DO Status Display on a C7-633 P
Table 3-1 Explanation of the DI/DO Display in Figure 3-3
Position Explanation
ÀSignal status of the DI/DO
S1 DI/DO set
S0 DI/DO reset
ÁPin no. from - to
Note
The values of the digital I/O are read in and displayed every 400 ms. Any
changes which occur between these times are not displayed.
The DI/DO image of the standard configuration accesses the digital I/Os of
the first configured programmable controller. Therefore, the first
programmable controller in the list should always be the C7 CPU. Otherwise
it is necessary to adapt the programmable controller access for the image.
Configuring the
DI/DO Status
Display
C7 CPU Access
Special Features of C7
3-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
3.4 Status and Error Indicators on the C7 CPU
The C7 has the following status and error indicators:
SF
BATF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
SF-IM
SF-DP
BUSF
Figure 3-4 Status and Error Indicators on the C7
The status and error indicators are explained in the order in which they are
positioned on the C7.
LED Meaning Explanations
SF (red) C7 CPU
group error Lights up for
SHardware faults
SFirmware faults
SProgramming errors
SParameter assignment errors
SMath errors
STime errors
SFaulty internal memory
SBattery failure or backup missing on POWER ON
SI/O error in the internal I/O functions
T o determine the error/fault more exactly , you must use the programming
device and display the diagnostic buffer.
BATF (red) Battery fault Lights up if the battery
SHas too low voltage
SIs defective
SIs missing
DC5V (green) 5 VDC supply for C7 Lights up if the internal 5 VDC supply is functioning correctly
FRCE (yellow) Force job Lights up when a force job is active
RUN (green) RUN mode for the
C7 CPU Lights up when the C7 CPU user program is being processed.
Flashes (2 Hz) during C7 CPU startup (then the STOP LED also lights up;
when the STOP LED goes out, the outputs are enabled).
Flashes (2 Hz) when the CPU is in HOLD mode.
Status and Error
Indicators
Meaning of the
Status and Error
Indicators
Special Features of C7
3-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
LED ExplanationsMeaning
STOP (yellow) STOP mode for the
C7 CPU Lights up when the C7 is not processing a CPU user program.
Flashes in 1-second intervals if the C7 CPU requires a memory reset
(MRES).
SF-IM (red) Interface module
group error Lights up when the connection between the C7 and the expansion rack is
faulty.
The following table explains the meaning of the LEDs which are assigned to
the PROFIBUS DP. Refer also to Chapter 11 in the manual /70/.
SF-DP
(red) BUSF
(green) Meaning Remedy
On On SBus fault (physical fault) SCheck the bus cable for short circuit or wire
break
SDP interface fault
SDifferent transmission rates in
multi-master operation
SEvaluate diagnostics, reconfigure or correct
errors if necessary
On Flashing SStation failed SCheck the bus cable is connected correctly,
check for short circuits or wire breaks
SAt least one of the assigned slaves cannot
be addressed
SWait until the C7 has completed its startup
SIf flashing does not cease, check the DP
slaves and evaluate diagnostics
On Off SDP configuration missing or faulty (also if
CPU was not set as DP master)
SEvaluate diagnostics, reconfigure or correct
errors if necessary
Off Off SNo error
Display Elements
for PROFIBUS
Special Features of C7
4-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Communication between the CPU and the
Operator Panel
This chapter provides you with information on configuration parameters that
are necessary for the communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU.
The communication is achieved using two data areas:
SThe user data area
and/or
SThe interface area.
The functions, structure, and special features of the various user data areas
and the interface areas are described in this chapter.
For those who are not yet familiar with OPs, we recommend the manual First
Steps with ProTool/Lite.
Section Description Page
4.1 Configured Communications Parameters 4-2
4.2 Overview of User Data Areas 4-3
4.3 Event and Alarm Messages 4-4
4.4 Keyboard and LED Image 4-8
4.4.1 System Keyboard Image 4-9
4.4.2 Function Keyboard Image 4-10
4.4.3 LED Image 4-11
4.5 Screen Number Area 4-12
4.6 User Version 4-13
4.7 Interface Area 4-14
4.7.1 Control and Checkback Bits 4-15
4.7.2 Data Areas in the Interface Area 4-17
4.8 Recipes 4-19
4.8.1 Transferring Data Records 4-20
4.8.2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records, and the Requisite
Data Areas 4-20
4.8.3 Synchronization during Transfer - Normal Case 4-21
4.8.4 Synchronization during Transfer - Special Cases 4-22
4.9 Notes on Optimization 4-23
4.10 Data Exchange via the Interface Area 4-24
4.10.1 Example of How to Activate a Control Job 4-31
In This Chapter
Chapter
Overview
4
4-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.1 Configured Communications Parameters
In the configuration software, the following parameters are to be set for
communication via the MPI:
Note
The following parameters are already assigned generally applicable default
values and need not be modified unless the C7 is used in connection with
any other S7, C7, or OP units in a network.
Parameter Explanation
CPU type CPU in programmable controller
The S7-300 is to be set for the C7 CPU. If further CPUs are
connected, they must be set with S7-300 or S7-400.
CPU address MPI address of the C7 CPU in the network configuration. The
default address is 2. The address can be freely assigned. It must
be unique in a network.
Slot/rack Here you must set the slot and rack. For the C7 CPU, the
setting is:
Slot 2
Rack 0
C7 OP address MPI address of the C7 OP in the network configuration. The
address can be freely assigned. It must be unique in the
network configuration. The default value is address 1.
Interface Here, you determine which interface of the OP the C7 CPU is
connected to.
Transmission rate The data transfer rate between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU can
be set between 19.2 Kbps and 1.5 Mbps.
All settings can be made with ProTool and ProTool/Lite under the menu
command System → PLC .
Parameters
Configuration Tool
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.2 Overview of User Data Areas
User data areas are used to exchange data between the C7 CPU and the
C7 OP. It is by means of these data areas that the C7 CPU and the C7 OP
communicate.
The communication process consists of the C7 OP and the user program
alternately writing and reading information into and out of the data areas.
Upon evaluation of the data, the C7 CPU and the C7 OP are triggered into
the various actions.
The user data areas can reside in any required memory area in the C7 CPU.
The following user data areas are possible:
SEvent messages
SAlarm messages
SControl jobs
SRecipes
SSystem keyboard image
SFunction keyboard image
SLED image
SCyclic intervals (C7-634 only)
SDate and time
SScreen number area
SUser version
User Data Areas
Functionality
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.3 Event and Alarm Messages
Messages are triggered by setting a bit in one of the message areas in the
C7 CPU. The location of the message area is defined by the configuration
tool. The corresponding area must also be defined in the C7 CPU.
As soon as the bit in the event or alarm message area of the C7 CPU is set
and transferred to the C7 OP, the message is recognized as having “arrived”.
Conversely, after resetting the same bit in the C7 CPU, the message is
registered in the C7 OP as having “departed”.
Table 4-1 represents the number of message areas for event and alarm
messages and alarm acknowledgement areas, as well as the total length of all
areas, for both the C7-633 and the C7-634.
Table 4-1 Message Areas of the C7 OP
Device Event message area Alarm message ar ea and alarm
message acknowledgement area
Number Length (words)Number of
each type Total length of each
type (words)
C7-633 4 32 4 32
C7-634 4 64 4 64
A message can be configured for every bit in the configured message area.
The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending sequence.
Example:
The following event message area is configured for the C7 CPU:
DB 60 Address 42 Length 5 (in words)
Figure 4-1 shows the assignment of all 80 (5 x 16) message numbers to the
individual bit numbers in the control event message area.
The assignment follows automatically in the C7 OP.
Figure 4-1 Assignment of Message Bit and Message Number
Message
Triggering
Message Areas
Message Bit and
Message Number
Assignment
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
As alarm messages indicate faulty behavior of some sort, these must be
acknowledged. Acknowledgement follows either by:
STaking appropriate action on the C7 or
SSetting a bit in the acknowledgement area of the C7 CPU.
If the C7 CPU is to be informed about an acknowledgement of an alarm
message at the C7 OP itself, or if the acknowledgement should be given by
the C7 CPU, the corresponding acknowledgement areas are to be configured
in the C7 CPU:
SAcknowledgement area C7 OP ! C7 CPU:
The programmable controller is informed when an alarm message is
acknowledged by an operation at the OP.
SAcknowledgement area C7 CPU ! C7 OP:
The alarm message is acknowledged via the C7 CPU.
These acknowledgement areas are to be allocated in the configuration; -
when using ProTool and ProTool/Lite, under “area pointers”. Figure 4-2
shows schematically the individual alarm message and acknowledgement
areas
Internal processing /
linking
Alarm message area
Acknowledgement area
C7 CPU ! C7 OP
Acknowledgement area
C7 OP ! C7 CPU
Figure 4-2 Alarm Message and Acknowledgement Areas
Every alarm message has a message number. To this message number, the
same bit of the alarm message area and the bit multiplying of the
acknowledgement area are assigned. This is also valid for more than one
acknowledgement area, if the length of the previous acknowledgement area
does not encompass the entire length of the alarm message area. Figure 4-3
clarifies this situation.
Acknowledge bit for alarm message no. 49
Alarm message no. 1
Alarm message no. 49
Acknowledge bit for alarm message no. 1
Figure 4-3 Assignment of Acknowledge Bit and Message Number
Acknowledgement
Acknowledgement
Area
Assignment of
Acknowledgement
Bit to Message
Number
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
One of the bits set in the C7 CPU area, causes the acknowledgement of the
corresponding alarm message at the C7 OP. Reset this bit when you reset the
bit in the alarm message area. Figure 4-4 shows the timing diagram.
The acknowledgement area C7 CPU C7 OP
SMust be immediately connected to the relevant alarm message area
SMust have exactly the same polling time and
SCan have the sam e maximu m length as the corresponding ala rm message
area.
If the acknowledgement area C7 CPU → C7 OP is not physically located
behind the alarm message area, the system message $655 is issued when the
device starts up.
Alarm message area
Acknowledgement
area C7 CPU →
C7 OP Acknowledgement
via C7 CPU
Figure 4-4 Pulse Diagram for Acknowledgement Area C7 CPU → C7 OP
If a bit is set in the alarm message area, the CP OP sets the corresponding bit
in the acknowledgement area. If an alarm message is acknowledged at the
C7 OP, the corresponding bit is set in the acknowledgement area C7 OP
C7 CPU. In this way, the S7 can recognize that the alarm message has been
acknowledged.
The acknowledgement area C7 OP C7 CPU can have the same maximum
length as the corresponding alarm message area.
Alarm message area
Acknowledgement area
C7 OP → C7 CPU Acknowledgement
via C7 OP
Figure 4-5 Pulse Diagram forAcknowledgement Area C7 OP → C7 CPU
Acknowledgement
Area C7 CPU →
C7 OP
Acknowledgement
Area C7 OP
C7 CPU
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The acknowledgement areas may not be larger than the corresponding alarm
message area. It can, however, be configured to be smaller if it is not
necessary to acknowledge every alarm message. Figure 4-6 clarifies this
case.
Alarm message area Reduced alarm message
acknowledgement area
Alarm messages
that cannot be
acknowledged
Alarm messages
that can be
acknowledged
Figure 4-6 Reduced Acknowledgement Area
Note
Allocate important alarm messages, whose acknowledgement is to be
signaled to the C7 CPU in the alarm message area from bit 0 in ascending
order!
The two related bits in the alarm message area and the acknowledgement
area must not be set simultaneously.
Size of the
Acknowledgement
Areas
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.4 Keyboard and LED Image
Key actions on the C7 OP can be transferred to the C7 CPU and evaluated
there. In this way, actions can be triggered in the C7 CPU (for instance,
switching on a motor).
The LEDs in the C7’s function keys can be controlled from the C7 CPU. In
this way, active LEDs can be used in different situations to signal to the
operator which key they should press.
In order to make use of this function, you must:
SSet up corresponding data areas (images) in the C7 CPU
SSpecify these data areas as “area pointers” during the configuration
SAssign the bits from the “area pointers” to these data areas on configuring
the function keys.
The keyboard images are transferred spontaneously to the C7 CPU. That
means the transfer always happens if a change is registered at the C7 OP. In
this case you do not need to configure a polling time. A maximum of two
simultaneous key actions can be transferred at one time.
S All keys (except SHIFT key)
As long as the corresponding key is pressed, the assigned bit in the
keyboard image has the value 1, otherwise it has the value 0.
0
1
t= Key pressed
Bit value
SSHIFT key
When the SHIFT key is first pressed, the assigned bit in the keyboard
image receives the value 1. This state remains even after releasing the
key until the SHIFT key is pressed again.
0
1
t= SHIFT key
pressed
Bit value
Application
Prerequisite
Transfer
Value Allocation
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.4.1 System Keyboard Image
The system keyboard image is a data area with a fixed length of two data
words.
Every key of the system keyboard is assigned exactly one bit in the system
keyboard image, with the exception of the cursor keys.
The system keyboard image must also be specified as “area pointer, type:
system keyboard” in the configuration. This image can be assigned once only
and in one CPU.
Keyboard image:
Keyboard group bit
1st word
2nd word
INS
DEL
+/Ć .SHIFT
7
894
5
6
D
E
F
123
ABC 0
ENTER ESC ACK HELP
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit number
Note
Unused bits may not be overwritten by the user program.
The keyboard group bit serves as the control bit. It is set to the value 1 for
each transfer of the keyboard image from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU. After
evaluation of the data area by the user program, it should be reset.
You can determine whether a block has been transferred again by regularly
reading the group bits with the user program.
Layout
Keyboard Group
Bit
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.4.2 Function Keyboard Image
The image of the function keyboard can be categorized into separate data
areas:
SMaximum number of data areas - 4
STotal length of all data areas (words) - 4
The assignment of the individual keys to the data area bits is defined when
the function keys are configured. The number within the image area is
declared for every key.
The function keyboard image must also be specified in the configuration,
under “area pointer, type: function keyboard”.
The most significant bit in the last data word of every data area is the
keyboard group bit. It serves as a control bit. This bit is set to 1 for every
transfer of the keyboard image. After evaluation of the data area by the user
program, the keyboard group bit should be reset.
You can determine whether a block has been transferred again by regularly
reading the group bits with the user program.
Data Areas
Key Assignment
Keyboard Group
Bit
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.4.3 LED Image
The LED image can be categorized into separate data areas.
SMaximum number of data areas: 4 (for example, 4 different data areas in
various CPUs)
STotal length of all data areas (words) 8:
The LED image must also be specified under “area pointer, type: LED
image” in the configuration.
The assignment of the individual LEDs to the data area bits is defined when
the function keys are configured. The bit number within the image area is
declared for every LED.
The K keys in the C7 OPs have two-colored LEDs (red and green).
The bit number (n) denotes the first of two consecutive bits, which can
control four different LED states in total:
Bit n + 1 Bit n LED Function
0 0 Off
0 1 Flashing red
1 0 Permanently red
1 1 Permanently green
Data Areas
LED Assignment
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.5 Screen Number Area
The C7 OP stores information concerning the image displayed on the C7 OP
in the screen area number.
It is thus possible to transfer information about the current display contents
from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU, and from there, to trigger certain reactions,
for example, displaying another image.
If the screen number area is to be used, it must be specified as an “area
pointer” in the configuration. It can only be stored once and in one C7 CPU.
The screen number area is transferred spontaneously to the controller. That
means the transfer always happens if a change is registered at the C7 OP. In
this case you do not need to configure a polling time.
The screen number area is a data area with a fixed length of 2 data words.
The layout of the screen number area for the C7 OP in the memory of the
controller is represented below.
Current screen type
Current entry number Current input field number
Current screen number
7070
1st word
2nd word
Entry Assignment
Current screen type 1: Image
2: Recipe
3: Special image
Current screen/recipe number 1 to 99
Current entry number 1 to 99
Current input field number 0 to 8
0: Entry number
All bytes of the screen number area are assigned with FF in the message
level and for the display of a contents directory.
For special screens the screen number area is assigned as follows:
0770
3Special screen number
FFHCurrent input field number
1st word
2nd word
Application
Requirement
Layout
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.6 User Version
You can check whether the C7 OP is connected to the right controller on
startup.
The C7 OP compares a value stored in the C7 CPU with the configured
value. This ensures that the configuration data are compatible with the C7
CPU. If the values do not match, the system message $653 is displayed on
the C7 OP and the device is restarted.
To use this function, preset the following values when configuring the
C7 OP:
SVersion number of the configuration (value between 1 and 255) under
System → Settings
SData type and address of the value stored in the controller for the version:
System → Area Pointers,
Select User Version in the Type: field.
Verwendung
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.7 Interface Area
The interface area is only necessary for the C7 CPU if its functions are to be
used or evaluated by the C7 CPU.
The interface area must be configured if you want to use the following
functions:
– Send control jobs to the C7 OP
– Synchronize date and time between the C7 CPU and the C7 OP
– Evaluate coupling identifier
– Recipes (transferring data records)
– Recognize C7 OP startup in the C7 CPU program
– Evaluate the C7 OP operating mode in the C7 CPU program
– Evaluate the C7 OP’s ready bit in the C7 CPU program
– Set cyclic interrupts (C7-634 only)
Figure 4-7 shows the layout of the interfac e are a. You can define the interfac e
area in a da ta bl ock or a mem ory area . The address of the int erfac e are a should
be spe cifi ed in the configura tion. This is nece ssary so tha t the OP knows where
to put the dat a.
The interface area should be created once per CPU.
Interface area:
70
Address
Control / checkback bits
n+0
n+4
Job area
n+12
n+14
n+25
Coupling identifier
Time
Date
n+13 Reserved
n+18
n+15
n+21
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
n+26
n+31 Cyclic interrupt bits
Figure 4-7 Layout of the Interface Area for the C7 CPU
Overview
Layout of the
Interface Area
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-15
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.7.1 Control and Checkback Bits
Three bytes are available in the interface area for the control and checkback
bits. Bytes n+0 and n+1 are used to coordinate between the C7 OP and the
C7 CPU. Byte n+3 is required for the transfer of data records and indirect
variables.
Byte n+0, n+1, and n+3 are described below.
The structure of byte n+0 is shown below. The diagram is followed by a
description of the individual bits.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address
n+0
Time
Date
Cyclic interrupt bit
Bits 5-6 Date/time 1 = New
The transfer of the date and time from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU
can be initiated by means of control job 41. These bits are set by
the C7 OP if a new date or a new time is transferred. The bits must
be reset in the control program after the date or time has been
evaluated.
Bit 7 Cyclic interrupt bit: 1 = New
The cyclic interrupt bit is possible only for the C7-634.
If the C7-634 has set a new cyclic interrupt bit in the interface area,
it also sets the corresponding bit in the control and checkback bits.
You therefore need only scan this bit to detect a change in the cyclic
interrupt bit. Following evaluation, the bit has to be reset in the S7
program.
The following diagram shows the layout of byte n+1. Afterwards follows the
description of the individual bits.
76543210
Address
n+1
C7 OP ready bit
C7 OP operating mode
C7 OP startup
Introduction
Description of
Byte n+0
Description of
Byte n+1
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-16 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Bit 0 C7 OP startup
1 = C7 OP has been started
Bit 0 is reset by the C7 OP following startup. You can reset the bit
in the C7 CPU program and thus recognize when the C7 OP is
being restarted.
Bit 1 C7 OP operating mode
1 = C7 OP in offline mode
0 = C7 OP in normal mode
Bit 1 is set if the operator switches the C7 OP to offline. The bit
has a value 0 in an online condition.
Bit 2 C7 OP ready bit
The C7 OP inverts the ready bit within 1 second. In the C7 CPU
program, you can recognize whether a connection to the C7 OP
exists.
Byte n+3 serves to synchronize the transfer of data records and indirect
variables. The meanings of the individual bits are described below. Exactly
how the transfer works is described in Section 4.8.3.
Bit 0 1 = Data mailbox is disabled (set only by the C7 OP)
0 = Data mailbox is enabled
Bit 1 1 = Data record/variable is faulty
Bit 2 1 = Data record/variable is correct
Bit 3 1 = Data transfer completed
Bit 4 1 = Request data record/variable
Bit 5 1 = C7 OP should read data mailbox
Bit 6 1 = Request data mailbox disable
Bit 7 1 = C7 OP has read data mailbox
(with transfer C7 CPU→C7 OP)
Description of
Byte n+3
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-17
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.7.2 Data Areas in the Interface Area
In this section, the structure and use of the interface data areas are described.
The C7 CPU initiates an action to be carried out on the C7 OP by means of
the job area. All other bytes are areas in which the C7 OP writes data. These
areas can be evaluated by the C7 CPU program. The individual bytes are
described below.
Bytes n+4 to n+11 :
Control jobs can be passed on to the C7 OP via the job area. The actions on
the C7 OP are initiated in this way.
The job area consists of four words. In the first word of the job area is the job
number. In the other words, the job parameters are to be entered (maximum
3). Figure 4-8 shows the general structure of a control job.
If the first word of the job area is not equal to zero, the C7 OP evaluates the
control job. After that, the C7 OP sets this data word to zero again. For this
reason, the parameters must first be entered in the job area and only then the
job number.
The possible control jobs are listed with job numbers and parameters in
Section 4.10.
Byte n+13:
The C7 OP enters the coupling identifier 0 for the multipoint interface in
byte 13.
Time = bytes n+15 to n+17
Date = bytes n+21 to n+24
The date and time can be transferred from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU via
control job 41.
The following screens show the structure of the data area. All inputs are
coded in Binary Coded Decimal (BCD).
Time:
Hours (0...23)
n+15
Address
Minutes (0...59)
n+16
n+17 Seconds (0...59)
07
Date:
Overview
Job Area
Coupling Identifier
Date and Time
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-18 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Weekday (1...7)
Day (1...31)
Month (1...12)
Year (0...99)
n+21
Address
n+22
n+23
07
n+24
Bytes n+26 to n+31:
A cyclic interrupt is a periodically recurring point in time (hourly, daily,
weekly, annually) at which a predefined function is executed - for example:
SPrint message buffer or screen
SSelect screen.
When a cyclic interrupt is reached on the C7 OP, the corresponding bit is set
in this area:
n + 26
n + 30
70Address
16
32
48
1
17
33
Cyclic Interrupt No.
70
Cyclic Interrupt
Bits (C7-634 only)
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-19
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.8 Recipes
A recipe is a group of variables for a fixed data structure. You set this
structure in your configuration and assign data to it on the C7 OP. You cannot
modify the structure on the C7 OP later.
Since the data structure can be assigned several times, we refer to data
records. These data records are stored (created), loaded, deleted, and
modified on the C7 OP. The data are stored on the C7 OP, thus saving
memory on the C7 CPU.
Using recipes insures that, when a data record is transferred to the C7 CPU,
several items of data are transferred to the C7 CPU together and in a
synchronized fashion.
Data records can be transferred from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU or from the
C7 CPU to the C7 OP. You transfer data records from the C7 OP to the
C7 CPU to set specific values on the C7 CPU - for example, to produce
orange juice. In the same way, you can fetch data from the C7 CPU and store
them on the C7 OP as a data record to save, say, a favorable assignment of
values.
Note
Only variables are used to transfer data records. In order to transfer a data
record from the data medium (flash) of the C7 OP to the C7 CPU, it must
first be loaded into the variables.
A special feature of recipes is that the data are transferred synchronously and
cannot be inadvertently overwritten. To insure a coordinated procedure for
transferring data records, bits are set in the control and checkback byte 2 of the
interface area.
Overview
Transferring Data
Records
Synchronization
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-20 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.8.1 Transferring Data Records
When a data record is written, the variables in the data record are written
directly to the defined addresses concerned. With direct reading, the variables
are read into the C7 OP from the target memories of the C7 CPU.
With ProTool, the variables must have a direct link to the C7 CPU for direct
transfer. Variables not having an assigned address on the C7 CPU are not
transferred.
4.8.2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records, and the Requisite
Data Areas
During configuration, the recipe is given a name and a number. Both the
recipe name and the recipe number can be seen on the C7 OP.
The data records you create on the C7 OP are similarly given a name and a
number.
When a data record transfer is initiated from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU, the
recipe name and the data record number are transferred to the controller
together with the data. For this, you have to create a data mailbox in the
controller. Use the same specifications as were set in the configuration under
Area Pointer. The values of the data record are written directly to the
addresses in the controller.
Data mailbox:
Data record number
Reserved
Recipe number
Reserved
Reserved
1st word
2nd word
3rd word
4th word
5th word
Definition
Adressing/
Data areas
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-21
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.8.3 Synchronization during Transfer - Normal Case
The control and checkback bits in the interface area synchronize data record
transfer. A transfer is normally initiated by an operator input on the C7 OP.
Bit 0 1 = Data mailbox is disabled (set only by the C7 OP)
0 = Data mailbox is enabled
Bit 1 1 = Data record/variable is faulty
Bit 2 1 = Data record/variable is correct
Bit 3 1 = Data transfer completed
Bit 4 1 = Request data record/variable
Bit 5 1 = C7 OP should read data mailbox
Bit 6 1 = Request data mailbox disable
Bit 7 1 = C7 OP has read data mailbox
(with transfer C7 CPU → C7 OP)
Description:
Byte n + 3 = Control and checkback bits in the interface area
The following description shows the procedure by which the C7 OP sets
synchronizing bits and the manner in which the C7 CPU program has to react
to them.
Table 4-2 Procedure for Transmission
Step Explanation
1Bit 0 is checked by the C7 OP. If bit 0 is set to 1 (= data mailbox
disabled), the transfer is terminated with a system error message. If bit 0 is
set to 0, the C7 OP sets the bit to 1.
2The C7 OP enters the identifications in the data mailbox.
W ith an indirectly transferred data record, the data record values are also
written to the data mailbox. With a directly transferred data record, the
values of the variables are written to the configured address.
3The OP sets bit 3 to 1 (= data transfer terminated).
4The data record or the variable can be evaluated in the control program.
You then have to acknowledge in the control program whether the transfer
was correct or faulty .
Correct: bit 2 is set to 1
Faulty: bit 1 is set to 1
5Reset bit 0 in the control program.
6The C7 OP resets the bits set in step 3 and step 4.
Transferring Data
Records
Transfer C7 OP →
C7 CPU
(Initiated on
C7 OP)
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-22 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.8.4 Synchronization during Transfer - Special Cases
Make sure that the values of the data record are only read by the internal data
medium. The current values are not relevant to the data record transfer.
Step Explanation
1In the control program, request the data mailbox disable by setting bit 6 to
1.
2If a disable is possible, the C7 OP sets bit 0 to 1 and simultaneously resets
bit 6 to 0.
3In the control program, inform the C7 OP via the data mailbox which data
record it should transfer . T o do this, enter the identifications of the data
record in the data mailbox.
4Set bit 4 to 1 (= request data via data mailbox) in the control program.
5The C7 OP reads the data mailbox.
6The C7 OP resets bit 4 and transfers the data record or the variable as
described for case 1 from step 2 onwards.
Direct transfer from the C7 CPU to the C7 OP always takes place without
coordination. The values are read directly from the address. Variables without
addresses are ignored.
The values are written from the C7 CPU into the internal data medium.
Step Explanation
1In the S7 program, request the data mailbox disable by setting bit 6 to 1.
2If a disable is possible, the C7 OP sets bit 0 to 1 and simultaneously resets
bit 6 to 0.
3In the S7 program, inform the C7 OP via the data mailbox which data
record it should fetch by entering the recipe number and data record num-
ber in the mailbox.
4Set bit 5 to 1 (= C7 OP is to read data mailbox).
5When the C7 OP has fetched the data record, it sets bit 7 to 1 (= C7 OP has
read data mailbox). By setting bit 7, the C7 OP specifies that the read pro-
cess is terminated.
6Set bit 7 to 0.
A data record can be transferred from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU via control
job No. 70. Control job 69 initiates transfer from the C7 CPU to the C7 OP.
Transfer C7 OP →
C7 CPU
(Initiated by
C7 CPU)
Transfer
C7 CPU → C7 OP
(Initiated by
C7 OP)
Transfer
C7 CPU → C7 OP
(Initiated by
C7 CPU)
Transfer Using
Control Jobs
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-23
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.9 Notes on Optimization
The structure of the user data areas described in Section 4.3 and the
configured polling times in the area pointers are significant factors for the
update times that can actually be achieved. The update time is the polling
time plus the transfer time plus the processing time.
To achieve an optimal update time, the following points should be observed
during configuration:
SConfigure the individual data areas as large as necessary, but as small as
possible.
SDefine the data areas which belong together contiguously. The actual
update time improves if you configure one large area as opposed to
several small areas.
SThe total performance is unnecessarily compromised if the polling times
are too small. Set the polling time according to the changing speed of the
process values. The change in temperature of an oven for example, is
significantly more sluggish than the change of rotary speed in an
electrical drive.
SThe approximate value for the polling time is around 1 second.
SAvoid cyclic transfer of the user data areas (polling time 0) if necessary in
order to improve the update time. Instead of this use the control jobs to
transfer the user data areas as required according to events.
SPlace the variables of a message or a screen without gaps in one data
area.
SIn order that changes in the C7 CPU are recognized by the C7 OP, they
must at least be pending during the actual polling time.
Decisive Factors
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-24 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.10 Control Jobs and Their Parameters
Using control jobs, functions on the C7 OP can be triggered by the control
program, such as:
– Displaying screens
– Setting the time and date
– Changing general settings
A control job is identified by its job number. Up to three parameters can be
transferred depending on the control job.
A control job comprises four data words. The first data word contains the job
number. Depending on the function, up to three parameters can be passed in
data words 2 to 4. Figure 4-8 shows the general structure of a control job.
0
Word 1
Left byte (LB) Right byte (RB)
Job no.
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Address
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Figure 4-8 Structure of a Control Job
Description
Control Job
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-25
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The following table lists all possible control jobs with their parameters. The
column No. gives the job number for the controller. Control jobs can only be
triggered by the controller when the C7 is in online operation.
No. Function
3 Hardcopy
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
5Select contents directory
Parameter 1 1: Contents: screens, display
2: Contents: recipes, display
4: Contents: print screens
5: Contents: print recipes
7: Contents: recipes, data record transfer
Parameters 2, 3 -
7Print all screens
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
10 Print r ecipe with all data r ecords
Parameter 1 Recipe number (1 to 99)
Parameters 2, 3 -
11 Select special screens
The following screens integrated in the firmware can be selected via their (fixed)
object number .
Parameter 1 LB: Cursor lock (0: off, 1: on)
RB: Special screen number
Alarm message buffer
1 Buf fer output
2 Output number of messages
3 Overflow warning on/off
4 Delete buffer yes/no
Event message buffer
5 Buf fer output
6 Output number of messages
7 Overflow warning on/off
8 Delete buffer yes/no
Pr ogramming device functions
25 Status VAR
26 Modify VAR
Special functions
30 Language, brightness (contrast)
31 Change operating mode
Settings
35 Set time/date
36 Internal interface (C7-633: RS 232;
C7-634: IF1)
37 Submodule interface (C7-633: TTY; C7-634: IF2)
38 Printer parameters
40 Message type
Message texts
45 Display alarm message texts
46 Display event message texts
Listing
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-26 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
No. Function
System messages
50 Output system message buffer
Passwords
55 Login
56 Password input
Parameters 2, 3 -
12 Message log on/off
Parameter 1 0: Off
1: On
Parameters 2, 3 -
13 Change language
Parameter 1 0: 1st language
1: 2nd language
2: 3rd language
Parameters 2, 3 -
14 Set time (BCD-coded)
Parameter 1 LB: -
RB: Hours (0 to 23)
Parameter 2 LB: Minutes (0 to 59)
RB: Seconds (0 to 59)
Parameter 3 -
15 Set date (BCD-coded)
Parameter 1 LB: -
RB: Weekday (1 to 7: Sunday to Saturday)
Parameter 2 LB: Date (1 to 31)
RB: Month (1 to 12)
Parameter 3 LB: Year
16 Parameters for internal interface (C7-633:RS 232; C7-634: IF1)
Parameter 1 Value for parameter 2
Transmission rate (only for printer)
0: 300 bps
1: 600 bps
2: 1200 bps
3: 2400 bps
4: 4800 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps
Data bits (only for printer)
0: 7 data bits
1: 8 data bits
Stop bits (only for printer)
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
Parity (only for printer)
0: Even
1: Odd
2: None
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-27
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
No. Function
Parameter 2 Interface parameters to be set
0: Transmission rate
1: Data bits
2: Stop bits
3: Parity
Parameter 3 -
19 Printer parameters
Parameter 1 Value for parameter 2
Number of characters per line
0: 20 characters/line
1: 40 characters/line
2: 80 characters/line
Number of lines per page
0: 60 lines/page
1: 61 lines/page
:
12: 72 lines/page
Parameter 2 Printer parameters to be set
0: Number of characters per line
1: Number of lines per page
Parameter 3 -
21 Display mode for alarm messages
Parameter 1 0: First value (oldest message)
1: Last value (newest message)
Parameters 2, 3 -
22 Set display contrast
Parameter 1 0 to 15
Parameters 2, 3 -
23 Set password level
Parameter 1 0 to 9
0 = lowest password level
9 = highest password level
Parameters 2, 3 -
24 Password logout
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
31 Print alarm message buffer
Parameter 1 0: Print chronologically
1: Print together
Parameters 2, 3 -
32 Print event message buffer
Parameter 1 0: Print chronologically
1: Print together
Parameters 2, 3 -
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-28 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
No. Function
37 Overflow warning for event messages on/off
Parameter 1 0: Off
1: On
Parameters 2, 3 -
38 Overflow warning for alarm messages on/off
Parameter 1 0: Off
1: On
Parameters 2, 3 -
41 Transfer date/time to C7 CPU
At least 5 seconds should lie between two jobs otherwise the C7 OP will be
overloaded.
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
43 Fetch C7 CPU event message bit area
Parameter 1 Area pointer no.: 1 to 4
Parameters 2, 3 -
44 Fetch C7 CPU alarm message bit area
Parameter 1 Area pointer no.: 1 to 4
Parameters 2, 3 -
45 Fetch C7 CPU acknowledgement area
Parameter 1 Area pointer no.: 1 to 4
Parameters 2, 3 -
47 Transfer LED ar ea dir ectly to C7 OP
Parameter 1 Area pointer no.: 1 to 4
Parameter 2 LED image: 1st word
Parameter 3 LED image: 2nd word
In contrast to control job no. 42 (fetch LED area from C7 CPU), the LED image
is directly transferred with the control job here, thus achieving faster control of
the LEDs.
The specified LED area must not be configured larger than 2 DW.
48 Menu selection
Parameter 1 Menu number in the standard menu
1 Message level
Parameter 2 Menu item number
0: First menu item
1 to 20 Other menu items
Parameter 3 -
49 Delete event message buffer
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
50 Delete alarm message buffer
Parameters 1, 2, 3 -
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-29
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
No. Function
51 Screen selection
Parameter 1 LB: Cursor lock (0: off; 1: on)
RB: Screen number 1 to 99
Parameter 2 Entry number: 0 to 99
(0 = cursor set to the first available entry)
Parameter 3 Field number:
1 to 8 for C7-633
1 to 32 for C7-634
Output fields are ignored in the serial numbering system.
Note:
The input fields of an entry are numbered consecutively:
0 Entry number field
1 First input field
:
n Last input field
The numbering of the input fields starts from 1 again for each
entry.
52 Print screen
Parameter 1 Screen number (1 to 99) in byte format
Parameters 2, 3 -
53 Select recipe
Parameter 1 LB: Cursor lock (0: of f; 1: on)
RB: Recipe number (1 to 99)
Parameter 2 Data record number (1 to 99)
Parameter 3 LB: Entry number (0 to 99)
RB: Field number (0/1)
54 Print recipe
Parameter 1 Recipe number (1 to 99)
Parameter 2 Data record number (1 to 99)
Parameter 3 -
69 Transfer recipe data record from C7 CPU to C7 OP
Parameter 1 Recipe number (1 to 99)
Parameter 2 Data record number (1 to 99)
Parameter 3 0, 1 0: Data record is not overwritten
1: Data record is overwritten
70 Transfer recipe data record from C7 OP to C7 CPU
Parameter 1 Recipe number (1 to 99)
Parameter 2 Data record number (1 to 99)
Parameter 3 -
71 Partial screen updating
Parameter 1 0: Off
1: On
Parameters 2, 3 -
This job must only be triggered if no screen is selected.
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-30 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
No. Function
72 Cursor positioning in current scr een or r ecipe
Parameter 1 Entry number: 0 to 99
Parameter 2 Field number:
1 to 8 for C7-633
1 to 32 for C7-634
Parameter 3 Cursor lock (0: of f; 1: on)
73 Cursor positioning in current special screen
Parameter 1 Field number (0 to 8)
Parameter 2 Cursor lock (0: of f; 1: on)
Parameter 3 -
74 Keyboard simulation
Parameter 1 LB: Keyboard number
1 Internal function keypad
2 System keypad
RB: Password level
0: Will be evaluated
1: Will not be evaluated
Parameter 2 LB: Key code
Parameter 3 -
For keyboard simulation via a control job, take note of the transfer time from the
C7 CPU to the C7 OP. For example, the acknowledgement of an alarm message
by keyboard simulation on the C7 CPU can lead to an undesired result if:
- The alarm message in question has already been acknowledged by an
operation on the C7 or
- A new alarm message or system message arrives before the control job has
been evaluated.
If the “cursor lock” parameter is equal to 1 in one of the jobs 11, 51, 53, 72,
and 73, the selected input field can no longer be exited using the cursor keys
or the ESC key. The cursor lock will only be disabled again by:
SRepeating the job with the cursor lock = 0,
SAnother job which causes a change to the display on the screen.
If you try to exit the input field with the cursor lock activated, the system
message “$400 Invalid key pressed” is displayed.
Jobs with Cursor
Lock
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-31
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
4.10.1 Example of How to Activate a Control Job
The following describes the procedure for activating a control job:
1. Set up the interface block (contains the interface area) in the C7 CPU (for
example, DB52).
2. In the configuration, enter the interface block (DB52) in the “area
pointer”. This informs the C7 OP that this block exists.
3. The job is entered in the interface block by means of a C7 CPU program
(see Figure 4-9).
4. The C7 OP reads the interface block and executes the job.
Program for control job 51 “Screen selection”
CALL DB52 Call the interface block
L ScreenNo Enter parameter 1 (screen number) in the
T DBW6 job area of the interface block,
L EntryNo Enter parameter 2 (entry number) in the
T DBW8 job area of the interface block
L FieldNo Enter parameter 3 (field number) in the
T DBW10 job area of the interface block
L 51 Enter the job number in the job area of the
T DBW4 interface block to activate the job
Figure 4-9 Example of a C7 CPU Program
Procedure for
Control Job
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
4-32 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Communication between the CPU and the Operator Panel
5-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
5.1 Introduction
The C7 offers the following methods of communication:
SCommunication between C7/S7 stations
The controller can exchange data with other stations in the MPI subnet
via the multipoint interface and the communication functions
X_SEND/X_RCV, X_GET, X_PUT (SFC65, SFC66, SFC67, SFC68) and
global data.
SCommunication within a C7 station
The controller can read or write data to and from intelligent modules via
the PROFIBUS-DP interface or IM interface and the communication
functions I_GET (SFC72) and I_PUT (SFC73).
C7 ET 200 with
e.g. FM 355
S7-300 station
PROFIBUS DP
MPI
IM 361
S7-300 modules
e.g. FM
C7
These communication system functions (SFCs) are described below. You will
find a detailed description in /71/.
Communication Functions
5-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
5.2 Communication between C7/S7 Stations (MPI Subnet)
The communication SFCs offer the possibility of acknowledged data
exchange via non-configured S7 connections to other C7/S7 stations. Using
these communication SFCs, you can reach all communication partners on the
MPI subnet and transfer small quantities of data (max. 76 bytes).
From S7/M7/C7 CPUs you can also access variables in another C7/S7 CPU
(X_PUT/X_GET).
The connections to the communication partners are established dynamically
when the SFC is called. A free connection resource in each of the
communication partners will be required for this.
If there are no free connections resources available on the communication
partners, no new connections can be established (temporary lack of
resources, indicated as SFC error class in RET_VAL).
The communication SFCs must not be deleted in RUN mode, otherwise any
connection resources in use may not be able to be freed up (program changes
only in STOP).
The number of communication partners that can be reached one after the
other is greater than the number of connections that can be set up
simultaneously (corresponds to a CPU-specific quantity, see /70/).
Communication is also possible if the communication partners are in other
S7 projects.
The communication SFCs do not require any additional user memory (for
example, in the form of instance data blocks).
The SFCs can have parameters assigned which means the block parameters
can be changed dynamically during program processing. This means different
communication partners can be reached in succession using one SFC.
On the server side, no SFCs are required in the user program for specific
functions as these communication functions are already being dealt with by
the operating system.
Properties
Blocks
Communication Functions
5-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The following SFCs are available for communication via MPI subnet:
Blocks Description
SFC65
SFC66
X_SEND
X_RCV
Safe transfer of a data field to a communication partner,
meaning the data exchange is only complete when the
receive function (X_RCV) has accepted the data in the
communication partner.
SFC67 X_GET W ith this SFC you can read a variable from a
communication partner without having to place a
corresponding SFC on the communication partner .
This function is performed in the communication
partner by the operating system.
SFC68 X_PUT W ith this SFC you can write a variable to a
communication partner without having to place a
corresponding SFC on the communication partner .
This function is performed in the communication
partner by the operating system.
SFC69 X_ABORT With this SFC you can cancel an existing connection
explicitly without transferring data. This frees up the
corresponding connection resources again on both
sides.
For the above blocks, addressing the communication partner is done via the
MPI address configured in STEP 7. The communication partner can also be
in another S7 project.
The maximum data area which can be read/written as a contiguous field of
data by the operating system in the S7-300/S7-400 CPUs (X_PUT/X_GET) is
shown in the table below.
An array of the data types Byte, Word, and Double Word can be transferred
consistently up to a CPU-specific maximum length (see table).
CPU 31x (C7) CPU 412 CPU 413 CPU 414 CPU 416
8 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes
If larger amounts of user data are transferred using X_PUT/X_GET,
inconsistencies may arise.
Addressing
Data Consistency
Communication Functions
5-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
5.3 Communication within a C7 Station (PROFIBUS DP or IM)
The communication SFCs offer the possibility of acknowledged data
exchange via non-configured S7 connections to PROFIBUS DP partners.
Using these communication SFCs, you can reach all communication partners
which can be addressed via the I/O addresses of a station (for example,
function modules (FMs)).
The connections to the communication partners are established dynamically
when the SFC is called. A free connection resource in each of the
communication partners will be required for this.
The number of communication partners that can be reached in succession
within the station is not restricted.
The following SFCs are available for communication within a station:
Block Description
SFC72 I_GET W ith this SFC you can read a variable from a
communication partner without having to place a
corresponding SFC on the communication partner .
This function is performed in the communication
partner by the operating system.
SFC73 I_PUT W ith this SFC you can write a variable to a
communication partner without having to place a
corresponding SFC on the communication partner .
This function is performed in the communication
partner by the operating system.
SFC74 I_ABORT With this SFC you can cancel an existing connection
explicitly without transferring variables. This frees up
the corresponding connection resources again on both
sides.
For the above blocks, addressing the communication partner is done via the
module start address (I/O address) configured in STEP 7.
The maximum data area which can be read/written as a contiguous field of
data by the operating system in the S7-300 CPUs (I_PUT/I_GET) is shown in
the table below.
An array of the data types Byte, Word, and Double Word can be transferred
consistently up to a CPU-specific maximum length (see table).
CPU 31x (C7) CPU 412 CPU 413 CPU 414 CPU 416
8 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes
If larger amounts of user data are transferred using I_PUT/I_GET,
inconsistencies may arise.
Properties
Blocks
Addressing
Data Consistency
Communication Functions
5-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Communication Functions
6-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
6.1 Digital Inputs
The C7 has different digital inputs for connecting sensors.
This chapter lists the technical specifications of the digital inputs in the C7.
In addition to the technical specifications of the digital inputs, this chapter
also describes
SThe characteristics
SThe special features
SThe terminal connection and block diagrams of the digital inputs
The digital input function has the following characteristics:
S16 inputs, isolated as a group
SNominal input voltage: 24 VDC
SSuitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs), for
example.
Introduction
Digital Inputs
Characteristics
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 6-1 shows the terminal connection and the block diagram of the
digital inputs.
The pages following contain detailed technical specifications of the digital
inputs.
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1L+
1M
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
24 V
1L+
1M
Channel number
Digital inputs
24 V for DI
Block diagram
Minternal
Bottom view of C7
Pin No.
Parts with this shading
are not relevant to this
example.
Ground for DI
Figure 6-1 Terminal Connection and Block Diagram of the Digital Inputs
Terminal
Connection and
Block Diagram
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Specific Data of the Digital Input
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
SUnshielded
SShielded
600 m
1000 m
V oltages, Currents, Potentials
Nominal load voltage L + 24 VDC
Number of simultaneously
ener gizable inputs 16
Galvanic isolation
SIn groups of
Y es (optocoupler)
16
Permissible potential
difference
SBetween the M terminals
of the groups
SInsulation resistance
-
UISO = 500 VDC
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions No
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Input voltage
SNominal voltage
SFor “1” signal
SFor “0” signal
24 VDC
from 11 to 30 V
from -3 to 5 V
Input current
SFor “1” signal from 6 to 11.5 mA
Input delay time
SProgrammable
SAt “0” to “1”
SAt “1” to “0”
No
from 1.2 to 4.8 ms
from 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic In accordance with
EN 61131-2 (IEC
1131, Part 2)
Type of input in accordance
with IEC 1131 Type 2
Connection of 2-wire BEROs
SPermissible quiescent
current
Possible
v 2 mA
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
6.2 Digital Outputs
The digital outputs have the following characteristics:
S16 outputs, isolated
SOutput current: 0.5 A
SNominal load voltage: 24 VDC
SSuitable for solenoid valves and d.c. contactors.
When the supply voltage is switched on, the digital outputs send a pulse to
the outputs. A pulse can be approximately 50 ms within the permissible
output current range.
Characteristics
Special Feature
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 6-2 shows the terminal connection and the block diagram of the
digital outputs.
The pages following contain detailed technical specifications of the digital
outputs.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2L+
2L+
2M
3L+
3L+
3M
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2L+
2M
+24 V
+24 V
}
}
DO 0.0 to 0.7
DO 1.0 to 1.7
Channel number
Pin No.
Parts with this shading
are not relevant to this
example.
Digital outputs
Load power supply
Block diagram
Ground
Bottom view of C7
Ground
Pin No.
Figure 6-2 Terminal Connection and Block Diagram of the Digital Outputs
If the maximum permissible current is utilized for the load power supply,
both pins should be wired to avoid overloading of the contacts. For relatively
low currents, wiring of only one +24V pin is sufficient.
Terminal
Connection and
Block Diagram
Connection of
Load Power
Supply
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Specific Data of the Digital Output Function
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
SUnshielded
SShielded
600 m
1000 m
V oltages, Currents, Potentials
Nominal load voltage L + 24 VDC/0.5A
Total current of the outputs
(per group)
SUp to 20 _C
SUp to 45 _C
4 A
2 A
Galvanic isolation
SIn groups of
Y es (optocoupler)
8
Insulation resistance UISO = 500 VDC
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts No
Diagnostic functions No
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Output voltage
SAt “1” signal L + (- 0.8 V)
Output current
SAt “1” signal
nominal value
Permissible range
SAt “0” signal (quiescent
current)
0.5 A
5 mA to 0.5 mA
max. 0.5 mA
Lamp load max. 5 W
Parallel switching of 2 outputs
SFor logic operations
SFor enhancing
performance
Possible (outputs of
the same group only)
Not possible
Activating a digital input Yes
Max. switching frequency
SWith resistive load/lamp
load
SW ith inductive load
100 Hz
0.5 Hz
Inductive cutoff voltage
limited (internally) to L + (- 48 V)
Short-circuit protection of the
outputs
SOperating point
Yes, electronically
timed
1 A
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
6.3 DI/DO Status Displays
The DI/DO status display is not a system function but a configured image of
the C7 OP. You can create the DI/DO status display image yourself or copy it
from the standard configuration supplied with ProTool (image name:
Z_DI_DO).
The values represented are read as a direct process image of the digital
inputs and an internal process image of the digital outputs of the digital C7
I/O and displayed in binary format (BIN).
Note that the last state set by the program is displayed, although the real
process state of the digital outputs is 0 when the C7 CPU is in STOP mode.
The following data are displayed:
= Anwahl der
10101010 1.7-1.0
DI:11101110 0.7-0.0
DO:11101110 0.7-0.0
10101010 1.7-1.0
ÀÁ
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 6-3 DI/DO Status Display on a C7-633/P
Table 6-1 Explanation of the DI/DO Display in Figure 6-3
Position Explanation
ÀSignal status of the DI/DO
S1 DI/DO set
S0 DI/DO reset
ÁPin no. from - to
Note
The values of the digital I/O are read in and displayed every 400 ms. Any
changes which occur between these times are not displayed.
The DI/DO image of the standard configuration accesses the digital I/Os of
the first configured programmable controller. Therefore, the first
programmable controller in the list should always be the C7 CPU. Otherwise
it is necessary to adapt the programmable controller access for the image.
Configuring the
DI/DO Status
Display
C7 CPU Access
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
6.4 Addressing the C7 I/O
The following section describes the addressing of the digital I/O. You require
this information to be able to address the channels for the digital inputs and
outputs in the user program.
Figure 6-4 shows the diagram for addressing the individual channels of the
digital I/O.
Address 0.1
Address 0.7
Address 1.0
Address 1.1
Address 1.7
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Address 287.3
GATE 3
Address 287.2
GATE 2
Address 287.1
GATE 1
Address 287.0
M
DI-X1
DI-X2
DI-X3
DI-X4
Byte address:
Digital I/O
Start address
Byte 287
Byte address:
Digital I/O
Start address
Byte 0
Bit address
Pin number
Address 0.0
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Inputs marked with this
hatching are not relevant to
this example
Byte address:
Digital I/O
Start address
Byte 1
Bottom view of C7
Figure 6-4 Digital I/O Addresses
Overview
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
6-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7 Di
g
ital I/O
7-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7 Analog I/O
Section Description Page
7.1 Analog Technology 7-2
7.2 Connecting Transducers to Analog Inputs 7-3
7.2.1 Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors 7-6
7.3 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output 7-7
7.4 Analog Input Function 7-10
7.4.1 Characteristics and Technical Specifications of the Analog
Input Module 7-11
7.5 Analog Output Function 7-15
7.6 Use and Function of C7 Analog I/O 7-18
7.6.1 Addressing the Analog I/O 7-18
7.6.2 Timing of the Analog I/O 7-19
7.6.3 Assigning Parameters to the Analog I/O 7-21
7.6.4 Representation of Analog Values 7-27
7.6.5 Representation of Analog Values for the Measurement
Ranges of the Analog Inputs 7-28
7.6.6 Representation of Analog Values for the Output Range of
the Analog Outputs 7-30
7.6.7 Conversion and Cycle Time of the Analog Inputs 7-31
7.6.8 Conversion, Cycle, Settling, and Response Times of
Analog Outputs 7-32
7.6.9 Behavior of the Analog I/O 7-33
7.6.10 Time Interrupt/Interrupt Cycle 7-35
7.7 Examples for Programming the Analog I/O 7-36
7.7.1 Block for Scaling Analog Input Values 7-36
7.7.2 Block for Scaling Analog Output Values 7-39
Chapter
Overview
7
7-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.1 Analog Technology
There are different analog inputs and outputs available to you in the C7 for
connecting sensors and/or loads/actuators.
This section covers the following:
SA description of analog value representation, the measuring types,
measuring ranges, and output ranges in the C7
SA description of how to connect the sensors or loads/actuators to the
analog I/O
SThe principles of using analog I/Os
SBehavior of the analog I/O
The C7 cannot be installed in an ungrounded configuration.
Introduction
Analog I/O
Ungrounded
Configuration
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.2 Connecting Transducers to Analog Inputs
You can connect various types of transducers to the analog inputs:
SVoltage transducers
SCurrent transducers
This section tells you how to connect up your transducers and what
precautions you have to take when doing so.
To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables
for the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be
grounded at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the
cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield. This
can interfere with the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the
shield at one end of the cable only.
The analog input is isolated and so there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the
C7 power supply (see Figure 7-1).
A potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the C7. Make sure that UISO
does not exceed the permissible value. Where it is possible that the
permissible value might be exceeded (see technical specifications), establish
a connection between the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the C7.
A potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur between the
measuring line AIx-M of the input channels and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA. However, this potential difference must not exceed
the permissible value (see technical specifications). Where it is possible that
the permissible value for UCM might be exceeded, or where you cannot
determine the difference in potential accurately, you must connect AIx-M to
MANA. Please observe this also for the unused inputs.
Overview
Cables for Analog
Signals
Isolated Analog
Input
Connecting
Transducers to
Analog Inputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The abbreviations used in Figures 7-1 to 7-3 have the following meanings:
AIx-X: Measuring line AIx-U or AIx-I
AIx-M: Reference potential of the measuring line
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal of the C7
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and MANA
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the
C7
The isolated transducers are not connected with the local ground potential.
They can be operated free of potential. Local conditions or interference can
cause potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) to occur between the
measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA. However, this potential difference must not exceed
the permissible value. Where it is possible that the permissible value for UCM
might be exceeded, or where you cannot determine the difference in potential
accurately, you must connect AIx-M to MANA.
Figure 7-1 shows the principle of connecting isolated transducers to an
isolated analog input.
Isolated
transducers
AIx-X
MANA
C7 CPU
UCM
ADC
M
UISO
AIx-M
AIx-X
AIx-M
L+
C7
Ground bus
Logic
Figure 7-1 Connecting Isolated T ransducers to an Isolated Analog Input
Abbreviations
Isolated
Transducers
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The non-isolated transducers are connected on-site with the ground potential.
Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences (static or
dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. To
prevent these potential differences, you must provide equipotential bonding
conductors between the measured value points.
In addition, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can arise between
the measuring lines AIx-M of the input channels and the reference point of
the measuring circuit MANA. However, these potential differences must not
exceed the permitted value. Where it is possible that the permissible value
for UCM might be exceeded, or where you cannot determine the difference in
potential accurately, you must connect AIx-M to MANA.
Figure 7-2 shows the principle of connecting non-isolated transducers to an
isolated analog input.
Non-isolated
transducers
MANA
C7 CPU
UCM
ADC
Ground bus
UISO
AIx-X
AIx-M
AIx-X
AIx-M
C7
M
L+
Logic
Figure 7-2 Connecting Non-Isolated Transducers to an Isolated Analog Input
Non-Isolated
Transducers
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.2.1 Connecting Voltage and Current Transducers
The abbreviations and mnemonics used in Figures 7-3 to 7-4 have the
following meanings:
AIx-X: Measuring line AIx-I or AIx-U
AIx-M: Reference potential of the measuring line
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
Figure 7-3 shows the connection of voltage transducers to an isolated analog
input.
MANA
ADC
+
-U
+
-
UC7 CPU
AIx-U
AIx-M
AIx-U
AIx-M
Logic
Figure 7-3 Connecting Voltage Transducers to an Isolated Analog Input
4-wire transducers possess a separate voltage supply. Figure 7-4 shows the
connection of current transducers as 4-wire transducers to a non-isolated
analog input.
MANA
ADC
P
P
Transducers, e.g.
pressure gauges
transducers
4-wire
+
-
+
-
L+ M
C7 CPU
AIx-U
AIx-M
AIx-U
AIx-M
Logic
Figure 7-4 Connecting 4-W ire Transducers to a Non-Isolated Analog Input
Abbreviations and
Mnemonics
Connecting
Voltage
Transducers
Connecting
Current
Transducers as
4-Wire
Transducers
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.3 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output
You can provide loads/actuators with current or voltage using the analog
output.
To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables
for the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be
grounded at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the
cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield. This
can interfere with the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the
shield at one end of the cable only.
The analog output is isolated and so there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the AO-M analog circuit and the M terminal of the C7.
A potential difference UISO can occur between the reference point of the
analog circuit MANA and the M terminal of the C7. Make sure that UISO does
not exceed the permissible value. Where it is possible that the permissible
value might be exceeded (see technical specifications), establish a connection
between the AO-M terminal and the M terminal of the C7.
The abbreviations and mnemonics in the Figures 7-5 to 7-6 have the
following meanings:
AOx: Analog output (current (AO-I) and voltage (AO-U) can be
assigned)
RL: Load/actuator
AO-M : Ground terminal (reference potential of the analog output)
L+: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the
C7.
Figures 7-5 to 7-6 show you how to connect loads/actuators to the current
and/or voltage outputs of the analog output module.
Overview
Cables for Analog
Signals
Isolated Analog
Output
Abbreviations and
Mnemonics
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
You must connect loads to a current output at AO-I and the reference point of
the analog circuit AO-M.
Figure 7-5 shows the principle of connecting loads to a current output of an
isolated analog output module.
C7 CPU ADC
RL
AOx
Ground bus
UISO
C7
M
L+
AO-M
Logic
Figure 7-5 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated Analog Output
Connecting Loads
to a Current
Output
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Connection of loads to a voltage output is only possible in 2-wire circuits as
there is only one output.
2-wire connection of loads to a voltage output is carried out at terminal AOx
and the reference point of the measuring circuit AO-M.
Figure 7-6 shows the principle of connecting loads to a voltage output of a
non-isolated analog output module with 2-wire connection.
C7 CPU ADC
Ground bus
RL
AOx
C7
M
L+ UISO
AO-M
Logic
Figure 7-6 2-Wire Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output of an Analog Output
Connecting Loads
to a Voltage
Output
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.4 Analog Input Function
This section contains
SThe characteristics of the analog input module
SThe technical specifications of the analog input module
You will learn
SHow to start up the analog input module
SThe measuring ranges provided by the analog input module
SThe parameters you can use to influence the characteristics of the analog
input module.
The following measurement types are available on the analog input module:
SVoltage measurement
SCurrent measurement
The measurement ranges are:
SVoltage: "10V
SCurrent: "20mA, 4 to 20mA
For the current range 4 to 20 mA, a current of < 1.6 mA is interpreted by the
software as a wire break.
Measurement ranges for current measurement with 4-wire transducers:
S"20mA
S4 to 20mA
This Section
Available
Measurement
Types
Measurement
Ranges
Wire Break Check
Measurement
Ranges for 4-Wire
Transducers
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.4.1 Characteristics and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input
Module
The analog input module has the following characteristics:
S4 inputs
SMeasured value resolution
– 12 bits incl. sign
SMeasurement type selectable:
– Voltage
– Current
SChoice of measurement range per input
SConfigurable diagnostics
SConfigurable diagnostic interrupt
SConfigurable interrupt cycle
SIsolated
Characteristics
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 7-7 shows the terminal connection diagram of the analog inputs.
AI1-U
AI1-I
AI1-M
AI2-U
AI2-I
AI2-M
AI3-U
AI3-I
AI3-M
AI4-U
AI4-I
2
1
3V
5
4
6V
8
7
9V
11
10
12 V
2
1
3
5
4
6
8
7
9
11
10
12
AI4-M
MANA
MANA
MANA
MANA
Pinout diagram
Voltage measurement
Analog inputs
Pin No.
Current measuremt.
Parts shaded in this way are not relevant
to this example
View of right-hand side of C7
Figure 7-7 Terminal Connection Diagram of the Analog Inputs
You can connect either a power sensor or a voltage sensor to an analog input,
but never both at the same time.
To prevent interference from occurring, all unused analog inputs should be
short-circuited.
Terminal
Connection
Diagram
Connecting a
Power/Voltage
Sensor
Unused Analog
Inputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Three pins are combined to form a channel.
Table 7-1 Channels of the Analog Input Module
Pin No. Value Channel
AI1-U Voltage input Channel 1
AI1-I Current input (AI1)
AI1-M Reference potential
AI2-U Voltage input Channel 2
AI2-I Current input (AI2)
AI2-M Reference potential
AI3-U Voltage input Channel 3
AI3-I Current input (AI3)
AI3-M Reference potential
AI4-U Voltage input Channel 4
AI4-I Current input (AI4)
AI4-M Reference potential
Figure 7-8 shows the block diagram of the analog input module. The next
page contains detailed technical specifications of the analog input module.
Internal
supply
Logic
AI1
AI4
•
•
•
•
•
•
Galvanic
isolation
ADC
Figure 7-8 Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module
Channels
Block Diagram
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Data Specific to Analog Inputs
Number of inputs 4
Cable length, shielded 200 m
V oltages, Currents, Potentials
Isolation
(analog I/Os to electronics)
Isolation resistance
yes
UISO = 500 V DC
Permitted potential difference
SBetween reference
potential of the inputs
AIx-M and MANA for
signal = 0V
UCM = 2.5 V DC
Analog Value Formation
Measurement principle Instantaneous value
SCycle time (all channels)
Cycle time (per channel) 2
0.5 ms
ms
SResolution in bits incl.
sign (incl. overflow
range)
12
Measurement ranges:
Voltage
Current
Measurement range
selected by connection
to different pins
" 10V
" 20mA, 4 to 20mA
Noise Suppression, Error Limits
Noise voltage suppression
SCommon mode noise
(UCM < 1.0 V) > 40 dB
Crosstalk between the inputs > 60 dB
Error limit (in entire
temperature range, relative to
input range)
SVoltage
SCurrent
" 0.8 %
" 0.8 %
Basic error limit (error limit at
25 _C, relative to the input
range)
SVoltage
SCurrent
" 0.6 %
" 0.6 %
Reproducibility in settled state
at 25 _C related to range 0.05 %
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Input ranges (rated
values)/input resistance
SVoltage " 10 V; /50 kΩ
SCurrent " 20 mA;
4 - 20 mA;
/105.5Ω
/105.5Ω
Permitted input voltage for
voltage input (destruction
limit)
Max. 30 V permanent,
38 V for max. 1 s
(pulse duty ratio 1:20)
Permitted input current for
current input (destruction
limit)
30 mA
Connection of signal sensors
SFor voltage measurement
SFor current measurement
as 4-wire transducer
as 2-wire transducer
Possible
Possible
Not directly possible
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts
SHardware interrupt
as cyclic interrupt
as cycle end interrupt
SDiagnostic interrupt
yes, selectable
yes, selectable
yes, selectable
Diagnostic functions
SDiagnostic information can
be read out
yes, selectable
yes
Time intervals yes, selectable
Wire break detection In measurement range
4 to 20mA, selectable
Technical
Specifications
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-15
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.5 Analog Output Function
This section contains
SThe characteristics of the analog output function
SThe technical specifications of the analog output function
You will learn
SHow to start up the analog output function
SThe various ranges of the analog output function
SThe parameters you can use to influence the characteristics of the analog
output function
SThe technical specifications of the analog output function.
The output function has the following characteristics:
S4 outputs
SThe outputs can be selected either as
– Voltage output or
– Current output
S12-bit resolution incl. sign
SConfigurable diagnostics
SIsolated
Note
If you modify the output ranges while the analog output module is active,
intermediate values can arise at the output!
This Section
Characteristics
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-16 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 7-9 shows the terminal connection diagram of the analog output
module.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
1
3
5
4
6
8
7
AO1
M
AO2
M
AO3
M
AO4
M
ANA
ANA
ANA
ANA
A
A
A
A
V
V
V
V
Terminal connection diagram
Current output
Voltage output
Analog output
Pin No. Parts shaded in this way are not relevant to
this example
View of right-hand side of C7
Figure 7-9 Terminal Connection Diagram of the Analog Output Module
Figure 7-10 shows the block diagram of the analog output module. You will
find detailed technical specifications of the analog output module on the
following pages.
ADC
AO3
AO1
AO2
AO4
Galvanic
isolation
Figure 7-10 Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module
Terminal
Connection
Diagram
Block Diagram
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-17
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Data Specific to Analog Outputs
Number of outputs 4
Cable length, shielded 200 m
V oltages, Currents, Potentials
Isolation yes
Dielectric strength UISO = 500 V DC
Measurement ranges:
Voltage
Current
Voltage or current
selectable
"10V
"20mA, 4 to 20mA
Analog Value Formation
Resolution (incl. overflow
range)
S"10 V; 20 mA;
4 to 20 mA 12 bits incl. sign
Conversion time (all active
channels) max. 4 ms
typ. 2 ms
Settling time
SFor resistive load
SFor capacitive load
SFor inductive load
0.1 ms
3.3 ms
0.5 ms
Substitute value
Idle power and voltage
Global value can be substituted
(one value for all channels)
Retain last value
yes, selectable
yes, selectable
yes, selectable
Noise Suppression, Limit Values
Crosstalk attenuation between
outputs u40 dB
Error limit (in the entire
temperature range, relative to
the output range)
SVoltage
SCurrent
" 0.8 %
" 1 %
Basic error limit (error limit at
25 _C relative to the output
range)
SVoltage
SCurrent
" 0.5 %
" 0.6 %
Output ripple (relative to the
output range) " 0.05 %
Reproducibility (in settled state
at 25 _C relative to the output
range)
" 0.06 %
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts
SDiagnostic interrupt yes, selectable
Diagnostic functions
SDiagnostic information can
be read out
yes, selectable
yes, group error
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Output ranges (rated values) " 10 V
" 20 mA
From 4 to 20 mA
Load resistance
SFor voltage outputs
SFor current outputs
SCapacitive load
SInductive load
min. 2 k W
max. 500 W
max. 1 mF
max. 1 mH
Voltage output
SShort-circuit protection
SShort-circuit current
Short-circuit proof yes
approx. 25 mA
Current output
SIdle voltage max."15V
Connecting actuators
SFor voltage output
2-wire connection
SFor current output
2-wire connection
possible
possible
Destruction limits for
voltages/currents applied
externally
SVoltage at the outputs
against MANA
SCurrent
max. 20 V DC
max. 40 mA DC
Technical
Specifications
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-18 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6 Use and Function of the C7 Analog I/O
This section contains:
SDescriptions of the basic terms in analog value processing
SHow to address and assign parameters to the analog I/O
SHow you allocate measurement ranges to analog input channels
SThe behavior of the individual analog input and output channels.
7.6.1 Addressing the Analog I/O
The address of an analog channel is always a word address.
An analog input/output has the same start address for the analog input and
output channels (see Figure 7-11).
AI1-U
AI1-I
AI1-M
AI2-U
AI2-I
AI2-M
AI3-U
AI3-I
AI3-M
AI4-U
AI4-I
AI4-M
MANA
Not occupied
AO1
AO2
AO3
AO4
MANA
MANA
MANA
Channel 1: Address PQW274
Channel 2: Address PQW276
Channel 3: Address PQW278
Analog inputs
Pin number
Channel 0: Address PIW272
Channel 1: Address PIW274
Analog outputs
Channel 2: Address PIW276
Channel 3: Address PIW278
Channel 0: Address PQW272
Inputs marked with this
hatching are not relevant to
this example
View of right-hand side of C7
Figure 7-1 1 Analog Input/Output Addresses
In This Section
Analog Function
Addresses
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-19
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.2 Timing of the Analog I/Os
The timing of the analog inputs depends on the current parameter assignment
of the analog I/Os (see Section 7.6.3). The duration of the measuring cycle
depends on the number of activated analog input channels. Deactivated
channels reduce the length of the measuring cycle.
The measuring cycle is the sum of the conversion times of the activated
analog inputs.
A/D conversion of the channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI1
Measuring cycle
Processing time
of a channel Processing time
of a channel Processing time
of a channel
t
Figure 7-12 Measuring Cycle when All Analog Input Channels are Activated
A/D conversion of the channels
AI1 AI3 AI4 AI1 AI3
Measuring cycle
Processing time
of a channel Processing time
of a channel Processing time
of a channel
t
Figure 7-13 Measuring Cycle when Analog Input Channel 2 is Deactivated
Analog Inputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-20 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The duration of the output cycle does not depend on the number of activated
analog output channels. This is always constant and deactivated channels do
not reduce the output cycle.
toutput cycle = 4 x t conversion time of a channel = const.
D/A conversion of the channels
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AO1
Output cycle
Output time
of a channel Output time
of a channel Output time
of a channel
t
Figure 7-14 Output Cycle when All Analog Output Channels are Activated
D/A conversion of the channels
AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 AO1
Output cycle
Output time
of a channel Output time
of a channel Output time
of a channel
t
AO2
Deactivated
channel
Figure 7-15 Output Cycle when Analog Output Channel 2 is Deactivated
Analog Outputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-21
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.3 Assigning Parameters to the Analog I/O
This chapter contains an overview of the analog I/O and their parameters.
You set the parameters for the analog I/O using the S7 application
Configuring Hardware. A parameter block is generated that contains all the
currently selected I/O parameters. After loading this parameter block, the
parameters are not immediately transferred to the analog I/O. The C7 CPU
then transfers the parameters to the analog I/O after every operating mode
change from STOP!RUN.
Alternatively , you can also change some parameters in the user program with
SFCs 55 to 57 (see Reference Manual /235/).
We subdivide the parameters for the two configuration alternatives into:
SStatic parameters and
SDynamic parameters
The following table explains when the static and dynamic parameters are
adopted.
Table 7-2 Time of Transfer of the Parameters from the C7 CPU to the Analog I/O
Parameter Set with Time of Parameter
Transfer
Static Configuring Hardware STOP -> RUN
Dynamic Configuring Hardware STOP -> RUN
SFCs 55 to 57 RUN
The following parameter blocks permit the assignment of parameters in
Configuring Hardware to define the following characteristics of the analog
I/O:
SFor inputs
– Basic settings
– Diagnostics
– Measurement
– Interrupt cycle
SFor outputs
– Basic settings
– Diagnostics
– Substitute values
– Output range
Overview
Parameter
Assignment
Assignment of
Parameters for
Characteristics
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-22 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 7-3 provides an overview of the analog input parameters.
T able 7-3 Analog Input Parameters
Parameter Analog Inputs
Value Range Preset Value
Basic settings
SEnable diagnostic interrupt Y es/No No
Diagnostics
SEnable
– Configuration/parameter
assignment error
– W ire break (only 4 to 20 mA)
– Range undershoot
– Range overshoot
SW ire break test (only for
measurement range 4 to 20 mA)
Yes/No
Yes/No
No
No
Measurement
ST ype of measurement
SMeasurement range
Deactivated
Voltage
Current
"10 V
"20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Voltage
"10 V
Interrupt cycle
SInterrupt
SInterrupt time
Yes/No
Unsolicited, 3ms,
3.5 ms, 4 ms,
4.5 ms to 16 ms
No
Unsolicited
Analog Input
Parameters
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-23
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
You can operate the inputs of the analog I/Os in three ways:
SWithout hardware interrupt
A free measuring cycle of all activated channels without generating
hardware interrupts.
A/D conversion of the channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Measuring cycle
of all activated
channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
t
Figure 7-16 Sequence of the Measurement with Four Analog Input Channels without
Generating Hardware Interrupts
SHardware interrupt as a cyclic interrupt
Free measuring cycle of all activated channels with generation of a non
measuring cycle-dependent hardware interrupt as a time interrupt with a
configurable interrupt time.
A/D conversion of the channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Measuring cycle
of all activated
channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
t
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Cycle time e.g. 3 ms Cycle time e.g. 3 ms
Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU
Figure 7-17 Sequence of the Measurement with Four Analog Input Channels and
Generation of Hardware Interrupts as Cyclic Interrupts
SHardware interrupt as cycle end interrupt
A measuring cycle with a configurable cycle time and generation of a
hardware interrupt as a cycle end interrupt.
Hardware Interrupt
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-24 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
A/D conversion of the channels
AI4
Measuring cycle
of all activated
channels
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
t
AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4
Cycle time e.g. 4 ms
Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU Hardware interrupt
to the C7 CPU
Cycle time e.g. 4 ms
A/D conversion of the channels
Figure 7-18 Sequence of the Measurement with Four Analog Input Channels with
Generation of Hardware Interrupts as Cycle End Interrupts
A hardware interrupt from the I/Os triggers the start of OB40 (hardware
interrupt OB) on the C7 CPU. In this case, the process variable
OB40_POINT_ADDR supplies the value DW#16#10000000.
Table 7-4 shows which parameters
SAre static or dynamic
SCan be set for all or individual analog inputs.
T able 7-4 Parameter Characteristics of Analog Inputs
Parameter Static/Dynamic Effective Range
Enable diagnostic interrupt Static Analog inputs/
Analog outputs/
Universal inputs
Enable diagnostics Static Channel
Wire break test Static Channel
T ype of measurement Dynamic Channel
Measurement range Dynamic Channel
Interrupt cycle Dynamic Analog inputs
Parameter
Characteristics of
Analog Inputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-25
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 7-5 provides an overview of the analog output parameters.
T able 7-5 Analog Output Parameters
Parameter Analog Output
Value Range Pr eset V alue
Basic setting
SEnable diagnostic interrupt Yes/No No
Diagnostics
SEnable
– Configuration/parameter
assignment error
– Substitute value switched on
Yes/No No
Substitute value
SIdle power and voltage (value 0)
SRetain last value
SGlobal substitute value
Yes/No
Yes/No
9400H...6C00H
Yes
No
0
Output range
SType of output
SOutput range
Deactivated
Voltage
Current
"10 V
"20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Voltage
"10 V
Analog Output
Parameters
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-26 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 7-6 shows which parameters
SAre static or dynamic
SCan be set.
T able 7-6 Parameter Characteristics of Analog Outputs
Parameter Static/Dynamic Effective Range
Enable diagnostic interrupt Static Analog inputs /
Analog outputs/
Universal inputs
Enable diagnostics Static Outputs
Substitute value
SIdle power and voltage
(value 0)
SRetain last value
SGlobal substitute value
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Outputs
Outputs
Outputs
Type of output Dynamic Outputs
Output range Dynamic Outputs
Parameter
Characteristics of
Analog Outputs
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-27
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.4 Representation of Analog Values
The representation of analog values, or an analog value in binary form, is the
same for all C7 analog inputs and analog outputs.
This section describes the analog values for all measurement ranges or output
ranges that can be used with the C7 analog I/O.
The digitalized analog value is the same for input and output values of the
same nominal range.
The representation of analog values is performed as a two’s complement
Table 7-7 illustrates the representation of the analog I/O:
T able 7-7 Representation of Analog Values
Resolution Analog Value
Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210
Weighting of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120
The sign (S) of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15:
S“0” ³ )
S“1” ³ *
The resolution is 12 bit. The analog value is entered into the ACCU left
justified. The unoccupied low significance places are written with “0”.
Table 7-8 contains an example of a bit pattern showing how the
unoccupied places for 12-bit resolution are filled with “0”.
Table 7-8 Bit Pattern of a 12-Bit Analog Value (Example)
Resolution Analog Value
Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210
12-bit analog value
(incl. sign) 0100011001110000
Overview
Representation of
Analog Values
Sign Conventions
12-Bit Resolution
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-28 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.5 Representation of Analog Values for the Measurement Ranges of
the Analog Inputs
The tables in this section contain the digitalized analog values for the
measurement ranges of the analog inputs.
In Table 7-9, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and
the associated decimal or hexadecimal representation of the units of the
analog values.
Table 7-10 contains the digitalized analog values for the various
measurement ranges.
Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, this
table contains only the comparison of the measurement ranges to the units.
This table is therefore clearer and easier to read. The corresponding binary
representation of the measured values can be referred to in Table 7-9.
The bits identified with “x” are not relevant to a resolution of 12 bits.
Table 7-9 Possible Resolutions of Analog Values
Resolution in Bits Units Analog Value
Resolut on
n
Bts
(incl. Sign) Decimal Hexadecimal High Byte Low Byte
12 16 10HS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x
Overview
How to Read the
Measured Value
Tables
Measured Value
Resolution
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-29
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 7-10 contains the representation of the digitized voltage measurement
ranges for "10 V and the digitized current measurement ranges "20 mA,
4 to 20 mA.
T able 7-10 Representation of the Digitalized Measured Value of the Analog Inputs (Voltage and Current
Measurement Ranges)
Measuring
Range
Measuring
Range
Measuring
Range
Units
Range
R
ange
" 10 V
R
ange
" 20 mA
R
ange
4 to 20mA Decimal Hexadecimal Range
w 11.759 w 23.516 0w 32512 w 7F00HOverflow
11.7589 23.515 22.81 32511 7EFFH
: : : : : Upper range
10.0004 20.0007 20.005 27649 6C01H
pp g
10 20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H
7.500 14.998 : 20736 5100H
:0 :0 4.000 :0 :0HNominal range
- 7.500 - 14. 998 3.9995 -20736 AF00H
- 10 - 20 .000 0 -27648 9400H
- 10.0004 - 20 . 0007 Underflow
range -27649 93FFH
: : : : Lower range
- 11. 759 - 23 .516 -32512 8100H
v- 11.76 v- 23.517 v -32513 v 80FFHUnderflow
Voltage and
Current
Measurement
Ranges
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-30 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.6 Representation of Analog Values for the Output Range of the
Analog Outputs
Table 7-11 contains the analog output ranges of the analog outputs.
Table 7-11 contains the representation of the voltage output range "10 V
and the current output ranges "20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Table 7-11 Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Outputs (Voltage/Current Output Ranges)
Output
Range
Output
Range
Output
Range
Units
Range
R
ange
" 10 V
R
ange
4 to 20 mA
R
ange
" 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal Range
0 0 0 w 32512 w 7F00HOverflow
11.7589 22.81 23.515 32511 7EFFH
: : : : : Upper range
10.0004 20.005 20.0007 27649 6C01H
pp g
10.0000 20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H
: : : : :
0 4.000 0 0 0H
0 3.9995
0
: : Nominal range
: 0 : - 6912 E500H
- 6913 E4FF H
: :
-10.0000 - 20.000 - 27648 9400H
10.0004 - 20.0007 - 27649 93FFH
: : : Lower range
-11.7589 23.515 - 32512 8100H
g
0 0 v - 32513 v 80FFHUnderflow
Table for Output
Ranges
Voltage /Current
Output Ranges
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-31
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.7 Conversion and Cycle Time of the Analog Inputs
You can find the definitions and relationships between conversion time and
cycle time for the analog inputs in this section.
The conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and an additional
conversion time necessary for the input calibration.
The analog-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitalized measured
values to the C7 CPU is performed sequentially, i.e. the analog input
channels are converted one after the other. The cycle time, i.e. the elapsed
time before an analog input value is converted again, is the sum of all
conversion times (0.5 ms/channel) of all activated analog input channels.
Unused analog input channels should be deactivated in the Configuring
Hardware application in order to reduce the cycle time.
Figure 7-19 illustrates an overview of how the cycle time for a 4-channel
analog input is composed.
Conversion time channel 1
Conversion time channel 2
Conversion time channel 4
Cycle time (max. 2 ms)
Conversion time channel 3
Figure 7-19 Cycle time of an Analog Input
If the interrupt cycle mode is assigned parameters, the new measuring cycle
is not started unless the time interrupt is initiated (see Section 7.6.3).
Introduction
Conversion Time
Cycle Time
Interrupt Cycle
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-32 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.8 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of Analog
Outputs
This section contains the definitions and relationships between relevant times
for the analog outputs.
The conversion time includes the acceptance of the digitalized output values
from the internal memory and the digital-analog conversion.
The cycle time, i.e. the elapsed time before an analog output value is next
converted is equal to the time for the conversion of the analog outputs.
The settling time (t2 to t3), that is the elapsed time between the creation of
the converted value and the attainment of the specific value at the analog
output, is load-dependent. You must differentiate between resistive,
capacitive, and inductive load.
The response time, that is the interval between providing the digital output
value and attaining the specified value at the analog output, is between
100 µs and 2 ms.
Introduction
Conversion Time
Cycle Time
Settling Time
Response Time
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-33
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.9 Behavior of the Analog I/O
This section decribes:
SThe dependency of the analog input and output values on the supply
voltages of the analog I/O and the operating modes of the C7.
SThe behavior of the analog I/O depending on the position of the analog
values in the respective value range.
SThe influence of errors on the analog I/O.
The input and output values of the analog I/O are dependent upon the supply
voltage of the analog I/O and the operating mode of the C7.
The triggering of a diagnostic interrupt is dependent upon the parameter
assignment.
Table 7-12 gives an impression of these inter-relationships.
Table 7-12 Dependencies Between Analog Input and Output Values upon the Operating State of the C7 and upon
the Supply Voltage L+
Operating state of C7 Input value of the analog input Output value of the analog output
POWER ON RUN Process value C7 value
STOP Process value Substitute value or
Retain last value
(configurable)
POWE R OFF STOP –0 signal
The behavior of the analog input is dependent upon the position of the input
values within the value range. Table 7-13 illustrates this dependency for the
analog input values.
Table 7-13 Behavior of the Analog Input Depending on the Position of the Analog
Input Value in the Value Range
Pr ocess Value lies in Input Value Diagnostics Interrupt
Nominal range Process value – –
Upper range/lower
range Process value – –
Overflow/underflow 7FFFHMessage 1Diagnostic interrupt1
1According to parameter assignment
Overview
Influence of the
Supply Voltage
and the Operating
Mode
Influence of the
Value Range on
the Input
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-34 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The behavior of the analog output is dependent upon the position of the
output values within the value range. Table 7-14 illustrates this dependency
for the analog output values.
Table 7-14 Behavior of the Analog Input in Relation to the Position of the Analog
Input Value in the Value Range
Output Value lies
in Output
Value Diagnostics Interrupt
Nominal range C7 value – –
Upper range/lower
range C7 value – –
Overflow/underflow 0 signal – –
Errors lead to a dia gnostic message and di agnostic inte rrupt if dia gnostic
param ete rs have be en assigned (see Sect ion 10.2 ).
Influence of the
Value Range for
the Output
Influence of Errors
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-35
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.6.10 Time Interrupt/Interrupt Cycle
If the interrupt cycle mode is assigned parameters, the new measuring cycle
is not started unless the time interrupt is initiated (see Section 7.6.3).
Use the STEP 7 application Configuring Hardware for parameter assignment.
If a hardware interrupt is transferred from the I/O to the C7 CPU, the
hardware interrupt OB (OB40) is called in the C7 CPU. The event which
called OB40 is stored in the start information (declaration section) of OB40.
You have to evaluate the additional information Z1 to Z3 in the start
information.
The entries in the declaration section of OB40 are listed in Table 7-15. The
bytes relevant to the user are hatched in the table.
T able 7-15 Declaration Section of OB40
Byte Meaning Meaning Byte
0 Class Identifier Event number 1
2Priority class Current OB number 3
4Data identifiers Z2/3 Data identifier Z1 5
6Additional information Z1 7
8Additional information Z2 9
10 Additional information Z3 11
12 Time stamp of event 13
14 15
16 17
18 19
Additional information Z1 contains the start address of the C7 I/O module
(bytes 6/7).
Address: 272 or 0110 H
Bit 4 of byte 8 = 1 in the case of an end-of-cycle interrupt.
Additional information Z3 is not used and assigned the value 0000H.
The evaluation of hardware interrupts in the user program is described in the
manual /234/.
Interrupt Cycle
Configurable
Events
Hardware Interrupt
OB
Declaration
Section of OB40
Additional
Information Z1
Additional
Information Z2
Additional
Information Z3
Evaluation in the
User Program
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-36 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.7 Examples for Programming the Analog I/O
The following examples for programming the analog I/O will help to
familiarize you with the principles of programming the C7 I/O.
7.7.1 Block for Scaling Analog Input Values
The FC126 block is used to convert the actual value entered as a
hexadecimal number in a peripheral input word into a corresponding-point
number (=analog value) to be output to a memory double word. For this
purpose, a simple calculation using the rule of three is programmed.
1. First, the actual value is related to the total range (RANGE_HEX)
resulting from the difference (UL - LL).
The result is a percentage of the absolute actual value. This is identical in
the floating-point number and in the hexadecimal representation.
2. Then the total range resulting from the difference (UL - LL) is calculated
in floating-point number representation, depending on whether the
measuring range is unipolar or bipolar.
3. Now the percentage (PERCENT) calculated before is related to the total
floating-point number range.
The result is the absolute read-in value.
4. Finally, the lower limit (LL) is added to this value as the offset.
5. The resulting floating-point number is output.
PERCENT=(channel - LL) / (UL - LL)
RANGE_HEX=UL - LL
actual value=PERCENT*(upper limit - lower limit) + lower limit
Overview
Function of Block
Summary of
Formulae
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-37
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The FC126 function contains the following statement lines:
FUNCTION FC 126: void
var_input lower limit: DWORD;
upper limit: DWORD;
channel: DWORD;
end_var
var_output actual value : DWORD;
end_var
var_temp LL:DWORD;
RANGE_HEX:DWORD;
PERCENT:DWORD;
end_var
BEGIN
//***Case: unipolar or bipolar measuring range?***
L lower limit; // lower limit negative?
L 0.0; // yes=> bipolar measuring range
<R;
JC bipo;
L DW#16#000_00000; // unipolar range lower limit
T LL
JU comp;
bipo: NOP 0;
L W#16#9400; // bipolar range lower limit
ITD;
T LL;
//***Computing the range (hexadecimal)***
comp:NOP 0;
L W#16#6C00; // upper limit for unipolar and bipolar
//range identical
ITD;
L LL;
-D;
T RANGE_HEX; // buffer difference
FC126 Sequence
of Statements
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-38 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
//*** Relating actual value to total measuring range***
L channel; // relate input value to total
// range
ITD;
L LL;
-D;
DTR;
L RANGE_HEX;
DTR;
/R;
T PERCENT;
//***Computing floating point number***
L upper limit; // calculate floating point number range
L lower limit;
-R;
L PERCENT;
*R;
L lower limit;
+R;
T actual value;
END_FUNCTION
An example for calling FC126 is described below.
Before calling the function, the range limits must be reassigned to memory
double words. This is necessary to enable using variable values. Normally,
“upper limit” and “lower limit” are fixed values.
This can be achieved by setting the “upper limit” and “lower limit”
parameters in the declaration section of FC126 to “REAL”. To enhance
flexibility in a test environment, this variant has been omitted.
Sequence of Statements in OB1
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1
var_temp start_info:array [0..19] of byte;
end_var;
BEGIN;
L10.0;
T MD4;
L -10.0;
T MD0;
CALL FC 126 ( lower limit:=MD0,
upper limit:=MD4,
channel:=PIW272
actual value:=MD8
);
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
Calling FC126 in
OB1
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-39
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
7.7.2 Block for Scaling Analog Output Values
The FC127 block is used to convert the setpoint to be specified in a memory
double word as a floating-point number to the corresponding hexadecimal
pattern (=analog value) which must be output to a peripheral output word.
For this purpose, a simple calculation using the rule of three is programmed.
1. First, the setpoint is related to the total range (RANGE_DEC) resulting
from the difference (upper limit - lower limit).
The result is a percentage of the absolute setpoint value. This is identical
in the floating-point number and in the hexadecimal representation.
2. Then the total range (RANGE_HEX), resulting from the difference (UL -
LL) is calculated in hexadecimal representation, depending on whether
the measuring range is unipolar or bipolar.
3. Now the percentage (PERCENT) calculated before is related to the total
hexadecimal range (RANGE_HEX).
The result is the absolute value to be output.
4. Finally, the lower limit (LL) is added to this value as the offset.
5. The resulting bit pattern is output.
PERCENT = (setpoint - lower limit) / (upper limit - lower limit)
RANGE_DEC = upper limit - lower limit
RANGE_HEX = UL - LL
Channel = PERCENT * RANGE_HEX + LL
The FC127 function contains the following statement lines:
FUNCTION FC 127: void
var_input lower limit: DWORD;
upper limit: DWORD;
setpoint: DWORD;
end_var
var_temp LL : DWORD;
UL : DWORD;
RANGE_DEC : DWORD;
RANGE_HEX : DWORD;
PERCENT : DWORD;
end_var
Function of Block
Summary of
Formulae
FC127 Sequence
of Statements
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-40 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
BEGIN
//***Case: unipolar or bipolar measuring range?***
L lower limit; // lower limit negative?
L 0.0; // yes => bipolar measuring range
<R;
JC bipo;
L DW#16#0000_0000; //unipolar range lower limit
T LL
JU comp;
bipo NOP 0
L W#16#9400; // bipolar range lower limit
ITD;
T LL;
//***Calculating the range (hexadecimal)***
comp: NOP 0;
L W#16#6C00; // upper limit for unipolar and bipolar
// range identical
ITD;
L LL;
-D;
T RANGE_HEX; // buffer difference
//*** Relating setpoint to total measuring range***
L upper limit; // compute range
L lower limit
-R;
T RANGE_DEC;
L setpoint; // relate setpoint to total
// range
L lower limit;
-R;
L RANGE_DEC;
/R;
T PERCENT;
//***Computing hex pattern to be output***
L RANGE_HEX; // relate hex value to total range
DTR;
L PERCENT;
*R;
L LL; // add offset
DTR;
+R;
RND; // convert floating-point number to
// 32-bit integer
T channel; // output result
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-41
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
An example for calling FC127 is described below.
Before calling the function, the range limits and the setpoint must be
reassigned to memory double words. This is necessary to enable using
variable values. Normally, “upper limit” and “lower limit” are fixed values;
the “setpoint” is variable.
This can be achieved by setting the “upper limit” and “lower limit”
parameters in the declaration section of FC127 to “REAL”. To enhance
flexibility in a test environment, this variant has been omitted.
Sequence of Statements in OB1
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1
var_temp start_info:array [0..19] of byte;
end_var
BEGIN
L -10.0;
T MD0;
L 10.0;
T MD4;
L 2.2;
T MD8;
CALL FC 127 ( lower limit:=MD0,
upper limit:=MD4,
setpoint:=MD8,
channel:=PQW272
);
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
Calling FC127 in
OB1
C7 Analo
g
I/O
7-42 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7 Analo
g
I/O
8-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7 Universal Inputs
Section Description Page
8.1 Universal Inputs 8-2
8.2 Use and Function of the Universal Inputs 8-6
8.2.1 Addressing Universal Inputs 8-6
8.2.2 Assigning Parameters to the Universal Inputs 8-9
8.2.3 Interrupt Inputs and Counter Interrupts 8-12
8.2.4 Counters 8-14
8.2.5 Frequency Counters 8-17
8.2.6 Period Time Measurement 8-19
8.2.7 External Gate Counter 8-22
8.3 Example for Programming the Counters 8-23
Chapter Overview
8
8-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.1 Universal Inputs
The C7 has 4 digital universal inputs that provide the following functionality:
SInterrupt input
SCounter input
SFrequency/period duration counter input
SDigital input
SExternal gate counter input
These input functions can be set by assigning them parameters; this
determines how the inputs are used.
Overview
C7 Universal Input
s
8-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 8-1 shows the pin assignments of the universal inputs
Pin No.
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Address 287.3
GATE 3
Address 287.2
GATE 2
Address 287.1
GATE 1
Address 287.0
M
DI-X1
DI-X2
DI-X3
DI-X4
Universal inputs
Parts shaded in this way
are not relevant for the
explanation.
View of right-hand side of C7
DI to control ext. gate counter 1
DI to control ext. gate counter 2
DI to control ext. gate counter 3
Figure 8-1 Pin Assignments of the Universal Inputs
Terminal
Connection
Diagram
C7 Universal Input
s
8-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The pin assignments of the universal inputs are as follows:
T able 8-1 Assignments of the Universal Inputs
Pin No. Function
MAssociated ground
DI-X1 Universal input 1 (interrupt, digital and counter input, external gate counter
16 bit)
DI-X2 Universal input 2 (interrupt, digital and counter input, external gate counter
16 bit)
DI-X3 Universal input 3 (interrupt, digital, counter, frequency counter and period
duration counter input, external gate counter 24 bit)
DI-X4 Universal input 4 (interrupt or digital input)
GATE 1 External gate pin for DI-X1
GATE 2 External gate pin for DI-X2
GATE 3 External gate pin for DI-X3
The universal inputs are set using software. This is done using the
Configuring Hardware application. You use this application to determine
which function the individual input is to execute (see Table 8-1).
If this function is set, the input responds like a normal interrupt input, that is,
a hardware interrupt is triggered in the C7 CPU as a response to the assigned
edge.
If this function is set, the input responds like a normal digital input (see
Section 6.1). The only difference here is that the current process signal is not
automatically given to the control program but must first be read in from the
I/O.
These universal inputs enable you to capture counter pulses up to a frequency
of 10 kHz. The counter can count either up or down. You can also assign
parameters to the count edge.
This enables you to count pulses within a programmed length of time. From
this you can calculate a frequency v 10 kHz.
This function enables you to count fixed timer ticks between two positive
edges. From this you can calculate the duration of an interval period.
This function enables you to count pulses within a gate time that starts with a
rising edge on the external gate pin and ends with a falling edge.
Pin Assignments
of the Universal
Inputs
Assigning
Parameters to the
Inputs
Interrupt Input
Digital Input
Counter Input
Frequency
Counter
Period Duration
Counter
External Gate
Counter
C7 Universal Input
s
8-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Specific Data of the Universal Inputs
Number of inputs 4 + 3 (gate pins)
Cable length, shielded 1000 m
unshielded 600 m
V oltages, Currents, Potentials
Nominal load voltage L + 24 VDC
Number of simultaneously
ener gizable inputs 4 + 3 (gate pins)
Galvanic isolation No
Function, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Interrupts
Counter functions
Max. counter frequency
Diagnostic function
Counters
SPrinciple
SCounter range C1/C2
SCounter range C3
SLimit value (setpoint)
specification
SCounter interrupt of up
counter
SCounter interrupt of down
counter
SEnable
Period Duration Counter
SPrinciple
SCounter range
SMax. period duration
Frequency Counter
SPrinciple
SCounter range
SGate width
SMax. frequency
Can be assigned
parameters
10 kHz
Module standard
diagnostics in
conjunction with
analog I/O.
No channel-specific
diagnostics
Max. 3
Edge counting
up 0 to 216-1
down 216-1 to 0
up 0 to 224-1
down 224-1 to 0
1 value per counter
When limit value is
reached
When “0” is reached
In the program
Max. 1
Counting fixed time
units between two
positive edges
0 to 224-1
8.395 s or 0.119 Hz
Max. 1
Counting of pulses
within a time period
0 to 224-1
0, 1 s, 10 s (can be set)
10 kHz; limited by
input filter
External Gate Counter
SPrinciple
SCounter range C1/C2
SCounter range C3
Max. 3
Edge counting via
external pin
0 to 216-1
0 to 224-1
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Input voltage
SNominal voltage
SFor “1” signal
SFor “0” signal
24 VDC
from 11 to 30 V
from -3 to 5 V
Input current
SAt “1” signal from 2 to 8 mA
Input delay time
SConfigurable
SFrom “0” to “1”
SFrom “1” to “0”
No
approx. 0.01 ms
approx. 0.01 ms
Input characteristic In accordance with
IEC 1131, Part 2
Type of input in accordance
with IEC 1131 Type 2
Input current
SAt “1” signal From 6 to 11.5 mA
Technical
Specifications of
the Universal
Inputs
C7 Universal Input
s
8-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2 Use and Function of the Universal Inputs
In this section you can find:
SBasic terminology about the function of the universal inputs
SHow you can use the universal inputs
SHow you can address and assign parameters to the universal inputs
8.2.1 Addressing Universal Inputs
You can select the following functions by assigning the appropriate
parameters to the universal inputs:
SDigital input
SInterrupt input
SCounter
SFrequency counter
SPeriod time counter
SExternal gate counter
The addresses for the universal inputs are default addresses which cannot be
changed. According to the application of the universal inputs, the results
occupy differing addresses.
For the address allocation, a distinction is made between:
SThe input range PIW280 to PIB287 for count values or signal state of the
digital inputs, and
SThe output/control range PQW 280 to PQB287 for counters
In This Section
Overview
Universal Input
Addresses
C7 Universal Input
s
8-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The 4 universal inputs of the input range (see Figure 8-1) have the following
addresses and weightings:
Table 8-2 Input Address of the Universal Inputs
Address Designation
PIB280
PIB281 CI1: Counter input
PIB282
PIB283 CI2: Counter input
PIB284
PIB285
PIB286
CI3: Counter input
Frequency/period
time counter
PIB287 Bit 7 ––
Bit 6
Bit 5 States of the count inputs see Table 8-3
Bit 4
Bit 3 Current state of universal input 4
Bit 2 Current state of universal input 3
Bit 1 Current state of universal input 2
Bit 0 Current state of universal input 1
The state of the individual inputs is stored as a bit pattern in PIB287:
Table 8-3 State of the Inputs
Address
PIB287 Status Display of Universal Inputs
Bit7 ––
Bit 6*) Bit = 1: Counter 3 enabled
Bit = 0: Counter 3 disabled
Bit 5*) Bit = 1: Counter 2 enabled
Bit = 0: Counter 2 disabled
Bit 4*) Bit = 1: Counter 1 enabled
Bit = 0: Counter 1 disabled
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit = 1: universal input 1 set. Bit = 0: universal input 1 reset.
Bit = 1: universal input 2 set. Bit = 0: universal input 2 reset
Bit = 1: universal input 3 set. Bit = 0: universal input 3 reset.
Bit = 1: universal input 4 set. Bit = 0: universal input 4 reset.
*) Only relevant if universal input was assigned as count input
Input Range
States of the
Inputs
C7 Universal Input
s
8-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
If the universal inputs are used as counters, then the behavior of the counters
is controlled via the output range.
Table 8-4 Addresses and Weighting of the Output Range of the Count Inputs
Address Contr ol of Counters 1 to 3
PQW280 Start/comparison value counter 1*
PQB287: Bit 0
Bit 1
0 = Counter 1 disabled 1 = Counter 1 enabled
0 = Do not accept new start/comparison value
1 = Set new start/comparison value
PQW282 Start/comparison value counter 2*
PQB287: Bit 0
Bit 1
0 = Counter 2 disabled 1 = Counter 2 enabled
0 = Do not accept new start/comparison value
1 = Set new start/comparison value
PQB284
PQB285
PQB285
Start/comparison value counter 3 *
PQB287 Bit 4
Bit 5
0 = Counter 3 disabled 1 = Counter 3 enabled
0 = Do not accept new start/comparison value
1 = Set new start/comparison value
*) Initial value for down counter, comparison value for up counter
Note
Please note that no direct read-in function is available for reading in the
complete counter status of counter 3.
When counting in the 0 to 65535 value range (2 bytes), the counter values
are stored in PQW285.
Output Range
C7 Universal Input
s
8-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.2 Assigning Parameters to the Universal Inputs
In the parameter block “universal inputs” you set the parameters for:
SThe interrupt inputs
SThe counters
SThe frequency meter/period time counter
SThe digital inputs
SThe external gate counter
You set the parameters for the universal inputs using the STEP 7 application
Configuring Hardware. A parameter block is generated which contains all
currently selected parameters of the universal inputs. After loading this
parameter block, the C7 CPU then transfers the parameters to the appropriate
universal inputs at every operating mode change from STOP ³ RUN.
If the universal inputs are used as interrupt inputs, a hardware interrupt will
be triggered on the C7 CPU for the assigned rising or falling edge at the
input. The default is the rising edge.
The universal inputs 1 to 3 can be assigned as:
SCounter input, 16 bit (counters 1 and 2)
SCounter input, 24 bit (counter 3)
SFrequency counter (input 3 only)
SPeriod time counter (input 3 only)
SExternal gate counter, 16 bit (inputs 1 and 2 only)
SExternal gate counter, 24 bit (input 3 only)
The counter values are made available to the user program as 16-bit or 24-bit
values and the frequency and period time counter values as 24-bit values.
The counter values of the external gate counter are either 16-bit or 24-bit
values, depending on the input.
Parameter Block
Universal Inputs
Assigning
Parameters
Interrupt Inputs
Counter Inputs
C7 Universal Input
s
8-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 8-5 lists the parameters for the above-mentioned functions:
Table 8-5 Parameter Block of the Count Inputs
Parameter Explanation Value Range Default Setting
Count input 1 Activate the count input and define the type of
counting Standard
Interrupt
Counter
HW gate counter
Standard
Define the count direction Up
Down Up
Set edge to be used for counting Rising edge
Falling edge Rising edge
Counter can trigger a hardware interrupt after
reaching the comparison value (when counting up)
or on zero transition (when counting down)
Yes
No No
No further parameters for external gate counter
(16 bit) – –
Count input 2 Activate the count input and define the type of
counting Standard
Interrupt
Counter
HW gate counter
Standard
Define the count direction Up
Down Up
Set edge to be used for counting Rising edge
Falling edge Rising edge
Counter can trigger a hardware interrupt after
reaching the comparison value (when counting up)
or on zero transition (when counting down)
Yes
No No
No further parameters for external gate counter
(16 bit) – –
C7 Universal Input
s
8-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 8-5 Parameter Block of the Count Inputs
Parameter Default SettingValue RangeExplanation
Count input 3 Activate the count input and define the type of
counting Standard
Interrupt
Counter
Frequency counter
Period duration
counter
HW gate counter
Standard
If counter activated then define the count direction Up
Down Up
If counter activated then define the edge to be used
for counting Rising edge
Falling edge Rising edge
If counter activated, then the counter can trigger a
hardware interrupt after reaching the comparison
value (when counting up) or on zero transition
(when counting down)
Yes
No No
If frequency counter selected, then select the gate
time for the frequency counting 0.1 s
1 s
10 s
1 s
No further parameters for period time counter – –
No further parameters for external gate counter
(24 bit) – –
If the universal inputs are deactivated in the parameter block (default
setting), then the inputs react as digital inputs. However, no automatically
updated process image will be made available to the user program for these
inputs. The current state of the input can only be read by means of a direct
I/O access. (See Table 8-2 or 8-3 for address).
Digital Inputs
C7 Universal Input
s
8-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.3 Interrupt Inputs and Counter Interrupts
If universal inputs are used as interrupt inputs, then a hardware interrupt will
be generated every time there is a corresponding (assigned) edge at one of
the inputs.
The universal input counters can be assigned parameters for hardware
interrupts. In this case, a forward counter triggers a hardware interrupt when
it reaches the comparison value, and a backward counter when it passes
through zero.
The parameter assignment can be performed with STEP 7 application
Configuring Hardware or with one of the system functions SFC55 to SFC58.
If a hardware interrupt is sent from the I/O to the C7 CPU, then the hardware
interrupt OB (OB40) will be called on the C7 CPU. The event that called the
OB40 is stored in the start information (declaration section) of the OB40.
You must evaluate the additional information Z1 to Z3 in the start
information.
The entries in the declaration section of OB40 can be found in Table 8-6. The
bytes that are relevant to the user are hatched in the table.
T able 8-6 Declaration section of OB40
Byte Meaning Meaning Byte
0 Class Identifier Event number 1
2Priority class Current OB number 3
4Data identifier Z2/3 Data identifier Z1 5
6Additional information Z1 7
8Additional information Z2 9
10 Additional information Z3 11
12 Time stamp of event 13
14 15
16 17
18 19
The start address of the C7 I/O module is contained in the additional
information Z1 (byte 6/7).
Address: 272 or 0110 H
Introduction to
Interrupt Inputs
Introduction to
Counter Interrupts
Assignable Events
Hardware Interrupt
OB
Declaration
Section of OB40
Additional
Information Z1
C7 Universal Input
s
8-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The consecutive number of the universal input that triggered the hardware
interrupt can be found in byte 8 of the additional information Z2. Byte 9 is
irrelevant.
You can find the additional information broken down into bits in Figure 8-2.
0
11
0
6543210
Byte 8
1, when universal input 1
has triggered hardware interrupt
7
0000
1, when universal input 2
has triggered hardware interrupt
1, when universal input 3
has triggered hardware interrupt
1, when universal input 4
has triggered hardware interrupt
0
1
0
1
Figure 8-2 Additional Information Z2
The consecutive number of the universal input that triggered the hardware
interrupt can be found in byte 8 of the additional information Z2. Byte 9 is
irrelevant.
You can find the additional information broken down into bits in Figure 8-3.
0
6543210
Byte 8
1, when counter input 1
has triggered hardware interrupt
7
0000
1, when counter input 2
has triggered hardware interrupt
1, when counter input 3
has triggered hardware interrupt
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Figure 8-3 Structure of Additional Information Z3 in Declaration Section of OB40
Additional information Z3 is not used and is set to 0000H.
The evaluation of hardware interrupts in the user program is described in the
manual /280/.
Additional
Information Z2 for
Interrupt Inputs
Additional
Information Z2 for
Counter Interrupts
Additional
Information Z3
Evaluation in the
User Program
C7 Universal Input
s
8-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.4 Counters
The counter calculates the actual value of the count from the count pulses (up
or down).
You can assign parameters with the STEP 7 application Configuring
Hardware or with the system functions SFC55 to SFC58 to define whether:
SA count pulse is triggered by a rising or falling edge at the corresponding
universal input
SCounting is up or down
SA hardware interrupt is to be triggered or not.
The counter calculates the actual value according to the following formula:
Actual value (counter up) = number of edges
or
Actual value (counter down) = start value minus number of edges
Counting up starts at zero or is continued from the last counter value until the
selected comparison value is reached or to the end of the count range (default
setting). The start value after resetting the counter is always zero. The
comparison value is set by the user program.
Counting down starts counting backwards from the selected start value or is
continued from the last counter value until the value zero is reached. The
start value is set by the user program.
The universal input counter counts count pulses up to a maximum frequency
of 10 kHz.
A frequency filter is fitted to the inputs.
!Warning
If the actual frequency exceeds the threshold frequency of 10 kHz, then the
correct function of the universal inputs can no longer be guaranteed, since
count pulses will be lost.
Before activating a counter in OB100, it is necessary to insert a delay time
of at least 5 ms via SFC47.
Counter
Actual Value of
Counter
Counting Up
Counting Down
Exceeding the
Threshold
Frequency
C7 Universal Input
s
8-15
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Note
The counting process on the C7 I/O module is asynchronous to the C7 CPU
user program. The user program is cyclically supplied with the current count
value (update time 0.5 ms). This means that when reading in the current
process value via the user program (for example, L PIW280), this value is up
to 500 µs older. With high counting frequencies there can be an offset of
several count pulses (for example, 10 kHz = 1 pulse every 100 µs; that is, the
counter has already counted up to 4 more pulses).
Depending on the application, it is necessary to take this into account (for
example, waiting time of > 0.5 ms after the counting encoder has stopped; or
using a hardware interrupt until counter end value).
The universal counter inputs are controlled by the user program.
Table 8-7 lists the different ways of influencing the counter in the user
program. For a detailed description of the individual bits in PQB287, please
refer to Table 8-4.
Table 8-7 Controlling Counters with the User Program
Aim Procedure
Start counter SEnter a valid start value (if counting down) or
a valid comparison value (if counting up)
(PQW280, PQW282, PQB284, PQB 285,
PQB 286)
SActivate the new start/comparison value
(PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’)
SStart the counter by selecting the start bit
(PQB287 falling edge ‘1’³‘0’
Stop counter SReset the start bit
(PQB287 falling edge ‘1’³‘0’)
Restart counter with counter
initialization (reset)
SIf necessary , enter a new start value or retain old
start value (for counting down) or comparison
value (for counting up) (PQW280,PQW282,
PQB284, PQB285, PQB286)
SActivate the new start/comparison value
(PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’)
SSet the start bit (PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’)
Restart counter without
counter initialization
(counter continues counting
without a reset)
SDo not set the new start/comparison value
SStart the counter by setting the start bit
(PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’)
Starting and
Stopping Counters
C7 Universal Input
s
8-16 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 8-7 Controlling Counters with the User Program
Aim Procedure
Select new start/comparison
value
SEnter new start/comparison value
(PQW280, PQW282, PQB284, PQB285,
PQB286)
SSet value
(PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’
– New start/comparison value will be
activated with the next rising edge at the
count input
– If counting up is running: new
comparison value will be accepted
– If counting down is running: new start
value will be accepted, current count value
will be corrected by the difference
Initialize counter (start of a
new counting process)
always occurs:
SAt zero transition (counting down) or
comparison value reached/exceeded (counting up)
SAfter setting the enable bit in the data area
(PQB287 rising edge ‘0’³‘1’),
if the bit “set new start/comparison value” is set
simultaneously (PQB287)
Generate hardware interrupt
and reset counter
SRequirement is that the option “hardware
interrupt = yes” has been assigned for the counter
SWhen counting direction is forwards, if count
value = comparison value
SWhen counting direction is backwards, if count
value = zero
C7 Universal Input
s
8-17
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.5 Frequency Counters
The universal input 3 (assigned as frequency counter) provides you with the
option of continuously counting identical edges within an assigned time
period for a frequency v 10 kHz.
Calculation of high frequencies.
The frequency is calculated from the measured value and the assigned
measurement period.
The signal to be measured is to be connected to the universal input 3 (see
Sections 8.2.1 and 8.2.2) of the C7. The frequency counter counts the rising
edges of the signal to be measured within the assigned time period.
From this, the user program can derive the actual frequency using the
following formula:
Frequency +Number of positive edges
Measurement period
You can assi gn para me te rs for the mea surem ent pe riod usi ng the STE P 7
application Configuring Hardware. You can choose betwee n the measure ment
periods 0.1 s, 1 s, or 10 s. The measurem e n t proc e ss is im m e dia t e ly rest a rt ed
afte r the measurem ent peri od has elapsed, so that an update d frequency counte r
value is al ways ava ila ble .
The measurement period is 1 s. During a measurement period, 6500 rising
edges of the signal to be measured are counted. The counter value 6500 is
made available to the user program.
Frequency +6500
1 s +6500 Hz
After starting up the C7, OB1 is processed and the universal input frequency
counter is automatically started.
The first valid frequency is calculated after the first measurement period.
Before the end of the first measurement period, the frequency counter value
FFFFFFH is available in the C7 CPU.
Start-up (OB100) Cycle (OB1) Cycle (OB1) Cycle (OB1)
-1 Valid frequency T ime
Start of
1st measurement period
Preallocated*
* Last frequency before STOP mode or
FFFFFFH if POWER ON)
End of
1st measurement period
Figure 8-4 Frequency During First Measurement Period
Overview
Application
Frequency
Calculation
Measurement
Period
Example of
Frequency
Calculation
Frequency During
First Measurement
Period
C7 Universal Input
s
8-18 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The universal input frequency meter is designed for a maximum frequency
of 10 kHz.
A frequency filter is fitted to the input.
!Warning
If the actual frequency exceeds the threshold frequency of 10 kHz, then the
correct function of the universal inputs can no longer be guaranteed, since
count pulses will be lost.
With relatively constant frequencies, the resolution of the measurement is
higher if you set a longer measurement period. Table 8-8 displays the
resolution of the measurement according to the configured measurement
period.
Table 8-8 Resolution of the Measurement
Measurement
Period Resolution Example of
Count Value During
First Measurement
Frequency
(Calculated)
0.1 s Frequency can be calculated in
10 H i t
900 9000 Hz
10 Hz increments 901 9010 Hz
1 s Frequency can be calculated in
1H i t
900 900 Hz
1 Hz increments 901 901 Hz
10 s Frequency can be calculated in
01H i t
900 90 Hz
0.1 Hz increments 901 90.1 Hz
The frequency meter calculates the frequency in longer intervals. This means
that with long measurement periods, an updated frequency value is more
seldom available. If the frequency continuously changes, then only average
values are available.
Due to the principle of measurement, the measurement error increases with a
reduction in the measured frequency.
Exceeding the
Threshold
Frequency
Resolution of
Measurement
Disadvantage of
Long
Measurement
Periods
Disadvantage of a
Short Frequency
C7 Universal Input
s
8-19
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.6 Period Time Measurement
The universal input 3 can be assigned as period time counter. This universal
input reads pulses from a transducer. The transducer could, for example, be
fitted to the barrel extruder of an injection moulding machine.
Calculation of low frequencies and rotation speeds.
The period time counter counts the number of increments (fixed time
intervals) of tzi = 0.5 ms between two rising edges. The first period starts at
the first transition from “0” to “1” (rising edge). It ends at the next rising
edge. This is also the start of the next period.
From this, a period time can be calculated:
tp = number of counted increments * 0.5 ms
In addition, for every rising edge, a counter is started that increases its value
by 1 every 0.5 ms until the next positive edge occurs.
The period time counter can be defined with a resolution of 0.5 ms.
Overview
Application
Principle
C7 Universal Input
s
8-20 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Figure 8-5 illustrates a simple transducer. The transducer supplies a “1” when
the light passes through one of the slots in the disc. If the disc rotates, then
the transducer delivers the signal shown in the diagram.
Slot disc
Signal
Signal
t
0
1
tzi
2nd period 3rd period
tzi = 0.5 µs
Increments
1
2
3
4
Counter value
1st period Counter value
2nd period
Period Time
Counter
tp = Counter value * 0.5 µs
1st period
Figure 8-5 A Simple Transducer such as a Slot Disc on a Shaft
If you know the number of pulses that are supplied by the transducer for each
revolution of the barrel extruder, then you can calculate the speed with which
the barrel extruder is rotating. An example follows:
N = 16 pulses are generated per revolution of the barrel extruder (N is known
as the slot number of the transducer). The interval between 2 pulses is 50000
increments (fixed time interval). The rotational speed of the barrel extruder is
calculated as follows:
v+1
Nxti minimum +1
16 x 50,000 x 0.5 ms+2.5 1
s+150 rev
min
Explanation of
Principle Based
upon a Simple
Transducer
C7 Universal Input
s
8-21
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The period time counter generates a 24-bit counter value. These 3 bytes can
represent values up to FF FF FEH (16777214 decimal). From this, the lower
threshold frequency for N = 1 is (when taking into account the maximum
period time stated below (tp = 8.39 s)):
fu +1
tp ;tp +16777214 * 0.5ms+8.39s
fu +0.119 Hz
And for N = 1, the lower threshold rotation speed
v+1
Nxminimum xti +1
1x8.39s+0.1191
s+7.14 rev
min
The upper threshold frequency results from the condition that the universal
inputs are designed for a maximum frequency of 10 kHz. The minimum
period time of 0.1 ms follows. Therefore the upper threshold frequency is
10 kHz (corresponding to 600,000 rev/min).
If this frequency is exceeded, then the input values will be erroneous, since
individual pulses will be suppressed by the input filter (of 10 kHz).
The relative measuring discrepancy gets smaller as the period time increases.
These thresholds are applicable for a transducer that generates one pulse per
revolution. If you use transducers that generate several pulses per revolution,
then you must reconsider the threshold frequencies.
The counter value FF FF FFH indicates a shortfall of the lower threshold.
Diagnostic messages will not be generated in this case.
In order to use the universal input 3 as a period time counter, this must also
be assigned as such (parameters). This is performed with the STEP 7
application Configuring Hardware.
Lower Threshold
Upper Threshold
Thresholds
Counter Overflow
Assigning
Parameters
C7 Universal Input
s
8-22 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.2.7 External Gate Counter
You can count pulses within a gate time with an external gate counter. The
counting direction is forwards. The counting process starts at zero with a
rising edge on the external gate pin and ends with a falling edge.
After the falling edge, a hardware interrupt can be generated and the new
count value is written to the output area.
Figure 8-6 illustrates gate time measurement with an external gate counter.
Upper count limit
Zero
Time
Current counter status
External gate pin
Overflow
DI3
Hardware
interrupt
to the C7 CPU
Hardware
interrupt
to the C7 CPU
Figure 8-6 Gate Time Measurement with an External Gate Counter
The gate time measurement is only activated if the start bit is set in the input
area at the same time as the external gate pin.
Counters 1 and 2 operate as 16-bit counters, while counter 3 is a 24-bit
counter.
The default value is 0xFFFF for counters 1 and 2 and 0xFFFFFF for counter
3. If no valid value is available, for example, during the first measuring cy-
cle, this default value is output.
If the count value exceeds the upper count limit and an overflow occurs, the
corresponding bit is set in byte 15.7 and value 0FFFFH (for counters 1 and
counter 2) or 0FFFFFFH (for counter 3) is output.
Gate Time
Measurement
Start Bit
16-Bit and 24-Bit
Counters
Default Value
Counter Overflow
C7 Universal Input
s
8-23
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
8.3 Example for Programming the Counters
The following programming example for the universal input counters is
intended to familiarize you with programming the I/O.
The program is intended to implement a simple function which shows the
principle of addressing the counter inputs by the STEP 7 program.
The counters are implemented to count up until the comparison value is
reached. They are reset when the comparison value is reached and counting
is restarted, beginning with zero. Due to the immediate reset, the specified
comparison value never can be read out.
In the following program example, the universal inputs are assigned
parameters as follows:
UI1 counter C1
UI2 counter C2
UI3 counter C3
UI4 standard digital input; not used in the example
The three counters are assigned parameters as follows:
Interrupt: yes
Counting dire ct ion: up
Edge: rising
Execution of block:
OB100
1. First, all three counters are stopped on startup.
This is necessary so that the counter will start counting from zero after a
complete restart. If this is not required, that is if the counter must
continue after a restart with its “old” value, the counters must not be
stopped.
2. After a waiting time of about 10 ms, a comparison value is written for
each counter.
This waiting time is required so that the STOP command for the counters
can become effective on the C7 module. In the complete restart OB
(OB100), the times are not critical since the cycles are not monitored.
3. Immediately after the comparison value has been written, the comparison
values are declared valid and the counters are started.
4. OB1
The counter values can be read cyclically in OB1. The counter status bits
are evaluated to ensure that the counters are active. OB1 is ended if not
all counters are activated.
If all counters are active, the read counter values are reassigned. This is
an optional feature which can be useful for specific applications. If the
same value must always be used within an OB1 cycle, re-assignment is
recommended (for example in the case of high counting frequency and
relatively long cycles > accessing OB1 more than once might supply
different values).
Overview
Function of Block
C7 Universal Input
s
8-24 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
5. OB40
This block is used for interrupt evaluation. A jump is executed by
evaluating the information of the interrupt vector register from the start
information of OB40 (LB 8). A memory byte is incremented as a function
of the counter which has triggered the interrupt. OB40 is programmed to
recognize even several interrupts occurring almost simultaneously.
6. OB35
OB35 is used to generate the count pulses. The following wiring is
required to execute the example:
Connect digital output 1.2 with DI-X1
Connect digital output 1.3 with DI-X2
Connect digital output 1.4 with DI-X3
In OB35, the output bits of the C7 digital outputs are toggled (alternately
enabled/disabled), and the effect is a period time of 200 ms at each
output, correponding to a frequency of 5 Hz. This value results from the
100 ms default cyclic interrupt time of OB35. This means that each
output is set to a logical “1” for 100 ms and then, also for 100 ms, reset to
a logical “0”.
With the Monitoring and Modifying Variables application in STEP 7, the
following can be monitored:
PIW280 current counter value C1
MW20 counter image C1
PIW282 current counter value C2
MW22 counter image C2
PIW285 current counter value C3
MW25 counter image C3
(C3: direct monitoring only possible with a counter status
between 0 and 65535, otherwise only indirect monitoring
possible in Monitoring and Modifying Variables )
MB40 number of interrupts triggered by C1
MB41 number of interrupts triggered by C2
MB42 number of interrupts triggered by C3
PIB287 status of counters
The OB100 complete restart block contains the following statements:
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB100
var_temp start_info : array(0..19) of byte;
end_var
BEGIN
//***Resetting the counters***
T PQB287; // C1, C2, C3
S7 Status
OB100 Statement
Sequence
C7 Universal Input
s
8-25
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
CALL SFC 47 // wait so that STOP becomes effective
(WT:=10000) // 10000 s = 10 ms
//***Setting comparison values***
L 10; // set comparison value C1
T PQW280;
L 20; // set comparison value C2
T PQW282;
L 40; // set comparison value C3
T PQW285;
//***Declaring comparison values valid and starting counter***
L 3F; // declare comparison value valid and start
T PQB287; // C1, C2, C3
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
OB1 contains the following statements:
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1
var_temp start_info : array(0..19] of byte;
status : BYTE;
end_var
BEGIN
//***Check whether all counters are active***
L PIB287; // scanning status bits
T status;
A L20.4; // C1 signalled active
A L20.5; // C2 signalled active
A L20.6; // C3 signalled active
JC run;
BEU;
//***Waiting time of 1 ms***
CALL SFC47 // “Wait function”
(WT:=1000); // 1000 s = 1 ms
//***Determining counter image (optional)***
run: NOP 0;
L PIW280; // C1
T MW20;
L PIW282; // C2
T MW22;
either
//*** Determining counter image for 16-bit counter ***
L PIW285; // C3
T MW25;
OB1 Statement
Sequence
C7 Universal Input
s
8-26 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
or
//*** Determining counter image for 24-bit counter ***
L PID284; // read in C3 (PIB284-286) and status byte (PIB287)
S RD8; // transfer PIB287 bits from ACCU
T MD24; // transfer ACCU or C3 to memory double word
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
OB35 contains the following statements:
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB35
var_temp start_info : array(0..19) of byte;
end_var
BEGIN
AN Q1.2; // assigned to C1
=Q1.2;
AN Q1.3; // assigned to C2
=Q1.3;
AN Q1.4; // assigned to C3
=Q1.4;
L QW0; // transfer QW0 immediately
T PQW0;
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
OB40 contains the following statements:
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB40
var_temp start_info : array[0..19] of byte;
end_var
BEGIN
//***Determining which input has triggered interrupt***
AN L8.0; // interrupt from C1?
JC c2;
L MB40; // counts number of interrupts from C1 (up to 255)
INC 1;
T MB40;
c2:NOP 0;
AN L8.1; // interrupt from C2?
JC c3;
L MB41; // counts number of interrupts from C2 (up to 255)
INC 1;
T MB41;
OB35 Statement
Sequence
OB40 Statement
Sequence
C7 Universal Input
s
8-27
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
c3:NOP 0;
AN L8.2; // interrupt from C3?
BEB;
L MB42; // counts number of interrupts from C3 (up to 255)
INC 1;
T MB42;
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
C7 Universal Input
s
8-28 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7 Universal Input
s
9-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
9.1 Data Set Description for Parameter Block of C7 Analog I/O and
Universal Inputs
If a reassignment is to be performed during operation, then the validity and
inter-relationships between the individual parameters must be checked by the
user program.
Incorrect value ranges of the parameters can result in incorrect behavior of
the I/O. Table 9-1 lists the layout of the parameter data sets.
Table 9-1 Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block
DS Byte Bit Default-
Value What Can Be Assigned Meaning of the Respective Bits
0 00 7 0 Enable diagnostics AO4 0=No 1=Yes
6 0 Enable diagnostics AO3 0=No 1=Yes
5 0 Enable diagnostics AO2 0=No 1=Yes
4 0 Enable diagnostics AO1 0=No 1=Yes
3
2
2
0
0
0
Enable diagnostics AI4
Enable diagnostics AI3
Enable diagnostics AI2
0=No 1=Yes
0=No 1=Yes
0=No 1=Yes
1 0 Enable diagnostics AI1 0=No 1=Yes
01 7..5 000 –
4 0 Enable diagn. interrupt module
3 0 Enable diagn. wire break AI4 0=No, 1=Yes (only if measurement range 4 to 20mA)
2 0 Enable diagn. wire break AI3 0=No, 1=Yes (only if measurement range 4 to 20mA)
1
0
0
0
Enable diagn. wire break AI2
Enable diagn. wire break AI1
0=No, 1=Yes (only if measurement range 4 to 20mA)
0=No, 1=Yes (only if measurement range 4 to 20mA)
02 0..7 00000000 Reserved Must always be zero, otherwise parameter
assignment error
03 00000000 Reserved Must always be zero, otherwise parameter
assignment error
1 04 7..6 00 AI2 –
5..4 01 Measurement range 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
3..2 00 AI1 –
1..0 01 Measurement range 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
Overview
Data Set Description, I/O Parameter Assignment
9-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 9-1 Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block
05 7..6 01 AI4 –
5..4 00 Measurement range 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
3..2 01 AI3 –
1 05 1..0 00 Measurement range 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
06 7..2
1..0
000000
00
–
Enable cyclic interrupt 00=No cyclic interrupt
01=Time cyclic interrupt
(only if byte 7 <> 1)
10=Cycle end interrupt(only if all AIx are not
deactivated)
07 7..4
3..0
0000
0001
–
Cycle time 0=16 ms, 1=Free-running, 6=3 ms, 7=3.5 ms,
8=4 ms etc. (increment 0.5 ms up to 15.5 ms)
08 7..6 00 Univ. DI1 –
5 0 Direction 0=Up, 1=Down (only if mode=010)
4 0 Edge 0=Rising edge, 1=Falling edge
3 0 Hardware interrupt 0=No, 1=Yes
2..0 000 Mode 000=General DI, 001=Interrupt DI,
010=Counter (CI), 101=External gate counter
09 7..6 00 Univ. DI2 –
5 0 Direction 0=Up, 1=Down (only if mode=010)
4 0 Edge 0=Rising edge, 1=Falling edge
3 0 Hardware interrupt 0=No, 1=Yes
2..0 000 Mode 000=General DI, 001=Interrupt DI,
010=Counter (CI), 101=External gate counter
10 7..6 00 Univ. DI3 gate time 00=0.1 s, 01=1 s, 10=10 s (only if mode=010)
5 0 Direction 0=Up, 1=Down (only if mode =010)
4
3
0
0
Edge
Hardware interrupt
0=Rising edge, 1=Falling edge
0=No, 1=Yes
2..0 000 Mode 000=General DI, 001=Interrupt DI,
010=Counter (CI), 011=Frequency counter (FC)
100=Period duration counter (PC), 101=External
gate counter
11 7..5
4
3
2..0
00000
0
0
0
Univ. DI4 –
Edge
Hardware interrupt
Mode
0=Rising edge, 1=Falling edge
0=No, 1=Yes
000=General DI, 001=Interrupt DI
12 7..6 00 AO2 Reaction to CPU STOP 00=Voltage/power idle (substitute value = 0)
01=Retain last value, 10=Global substitute value
(byte 14 to 15)
Data Set Description, I/O Parameter Assignment
9-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 9-1 Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block
5..4 01 Output area 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
1 3..2
1..0
00
01
AO1 Reaction to CPU STOP
Output area
00=Voltage/power idle (substitute value = 0)
01=Retain last value, 10=Global substitute value
(byte 14 to 15)
00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
13 7..6 00 AO4 Reaction to CPU STOP 00=Voltage/power idle (substitute value = 0)
01=Retain last value, 10=Global substitute value
(byte 14 to 15)
5..4 01 Output area 00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
3..2
1..0
00
01
AO3 Reaction to CPU STOP
Output area
00=Voltage/power idle (substitute value = 0)
01=Retain last value, 10=Global substitute value
(byte 14 to 15)
00=Deactivated, 01=10 V, 10=20 mA,
11=4 to 20 mA
14 ooooHGlobal substitute value for
AO1 to AO4 (only if “global substitute value” active on at least
one of the AO)
15
Data Set Description, I/O Parameter Assignment
10-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
I/O Diagnostics
In this section, you will learn which diagnostic messages you can set and
how the diagnostic buffer is structured.
The diagnostics of the C7 analog I/O are described.
This chapter also tells you how you can correct the reported errors for the
most important diagnostic messages of the C7 analog I/O with universal
inputs.
The term “module” refers here to a unit consisting of the analog I/O and the
universal inputs.
Section Description Page
10.1 Diagnostic Messages 10-2
10.2 Diagnostic Data of the C7 Analog I/O and Universal
Inputs 10-4
10.3 Dependencies and Reactions of the Diagnostic
Evaluation 10-8
In This Chapter
Chapter
Overview
10
10-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
10.1 Diagnostic Messages
The C7 CPU possesses a diagnostic buffer in which detailed information is
provided for all diagnostic events in the order of their occurrence. The
contents of the diagnostic buffer is preserved even after a memory reset on
the C7 CPU. The diagnostic entries in the diagnostic buffer can be read and
interpreted by the user program.
Errors in the system can be evaluated after a long time delay using the
diagnostic buffer in order be able to identify the cause of a STOP, for
example, or to trace and assign the occurrence of individual diagnostic
events.
Diagnostic events can be:
SErrors in an I/O (module)
SSystem errors in the C7 CPU
SChange in operating modes (for example, from RUN to STOP)
SProgram errors in the CPU program
The I/O diagnostics are divided into two groups:
SStandard diagnostics (general malfunction of the C7 analog I/O module
and universal inputs)
SModule-specific diagnostics
The standard diagnostics are always entered into the diagnostic buffers of the
C7 CPU after the occurrence of a diagnostic interrupt. The requirement is
that the module is able to diagnose.
The module-specific diagnostics provide detailed information regarding the
type and possible cause of the error. This information can be called up by the
user program by means of special system calls. The requirement is that
diagnostics have been enabled (default setting is always “no” in this case).
You can set whether the analog I/O diagnostic messages should be generated
using STEP 7.
Using the STEP 7 application Configuring Hardware, you can also assign
parameters to the diagnostic behavior of the analog I/O, i.e. you set whether
the analog I/O diagnostic messages should be sent to the C7 CPU on request.
Furthermore, you can assign parameters to define whether the module
should trigger a diagnostic interrupt in the C7 CPU after the occurrence of an
error.
Overview
Advantages
Diagnostic Events
C7 CPU I/O
Diagnostics
Assigning I/O
Diagnostic
Parameters
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
In the diagnostic information, we differentiate between permanent and
temporary diagnostic errors.
SPermanent diagnostic errors cannot be influenced by the user program
and can only be removed by resetting the C7 CPU (memory reset and
complete restart) or equipment exchange (after a fault).
STemporary diagnostic errors disappear automatically after a renewed
measurement (ADC error, overrange or underrange error), can be
removed by the user program (if necessary, by assigning parameters via
SFC55 during operation) or by hand at the connections (correcting the
wiring).
Diagnostic messages will be entered into the diagnostic buffer only if the
diagnostic interrupt OB (OB82) occurs. The requirement is that the
parameter “diagnostic interrupt enable = yes” was assigned. Then you can
read out the detailed diagnostic messages in addition to the standard
diagnostic information using the STEP 7 application Module Information
(see Manual /231/). No entry is made in the diagnostic buffer of the C7 CPU
in all other cases. Therefore the diagnostic message cannot be read out.
Diagnostic
Information (I/O)
Read Diagnostic
Messages
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
10.2 Diagnostic Data of the C7 Analog I/O and Universal Inputs
This section describes the C7 analog I/O and universal inputs with regard to
their module-specific diagnostic messages.
Table 10-1 provides an overview of the channel-specific diagnostic messages
of the analog input.
The diagnostic information is allocated to the individual channels.
Table 10-1 Diagnostic Message of the Analog Input
Diagnostic message Analog Input
Parameter assignment error Yes
Common mode error No
P short circuit No
M short circuit No
W ire break (only for 4 to 20mA by software) Yes
Reference error No
Underrange (underflow) Yes
Overrange (overflow) Yes
Only one group error exists for the analog output.
Possible causes of the group error could be:
SParameter error
SSubstitute value is connected
The diagnostic area consists of:
SData set 0: the standard diagnostic bytes (0 to 3)
SData set 1: the channel-specific diagnostic bytes (for enabled diagnostics).
– Bytes 4 to 7 and bytes 8 to 11 - channel and individual information
analog input (AI) diagnostics
– Bytes 12 to 15 - channel information- analog output (AO) diagnostics
Overview
Analog Input
Diagnostics
Analog Output
Diagnostics
Layout of
Diagnostic Area of
the Module
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Table 10-2 illustrates the structure of the diagnostic area and the meaning of
the individual entries.
T able 10-2 Structure of the Diagnostic Area
Byte Bit Meaning Explanation Value
Range
00 0Module fault 1 = error occurred, 0 = everything OK 0 | 1
1Internal error 1 = watchdog, EPROM, ADC error 0 | 1
2External error 1 = error at AI or AO 0 | 1
3Channel error 1 = with byte 0/bit 2 and channel-specific
diagnostic byte
byte 4 ...
0 | 1
4External auxiliary voltage missing (Cannot be checked) 0
5Front plug missing (Cannot be checked) 0
6Module not assigned parameters Normal state (standard parameters set)
byte 0/bit 0=0 ****) 0 | 1
7Incorrect parameters 1 with bit 8,9,10,11.0 or 15.0 (Standard
parameters set for channel 0 | 1
01 0Module class SM type class
1Module class SM type class 5
2Module class SM type class
3Module class SM type class
4 System-oriented channel-specific
diagnostic info. Yes 1
5User -defined diagnostic info. (diag.
info. not configured by system) No 0
6 –– –– 0
7 –– –– 0
02 0 Coding connector incorrect/missing –– 0
1Communications failure Error during transfer of parameters/input data 0
2Operating mode RUN/STOP 0
3Watchdog activated with bit 1 of byte 0 *) **) 0 | 1
4Internal voltage failed –– 0
5Battery 1 empty –– 0
6Entire backup battery failed –– 0
7 –– –– 0
03 0 Rack failure –– 0
1Processor failure –– 0
2EEPROM error Serial calibration EEPROM for analog measured
value calibration, set with bit 1 of byte 0 *) **) 0 | 1
3RAM error –– 0
4ADC error with bit 1 of byte 0 *) 0
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
T able 10-2 Structure of the Diagnostic Area
Byte Value
Range
ExplanationMeaningBit
5Fuse failure –– 0
6Hardware interrupt lost –– 0
7 –– 0
Channel-Specific Diagnostic Entries
04 0..7 Channel type AI of the following channel-specific diagnostic information 71H
05 0..7 Number of analog input channels 4
06 0..7 Number of diagnostic bits per
channel 8
07 Channel Vector Channel Group AI
0Error assigning parameters to DI1 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
1Error assigning parameters to DI2 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
2Error assigning parameters to DI3 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
3Error assigning parameters to DI4 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
4Error in channel AI1 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
5Error in channel AI2 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
6Error in channel AI3 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
7Error in channel AI4 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
08 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Byte AI1
0Parameter error in parameters for
channel 0 = no, 1 = yes *) 0 | 1
1..3 –– 000
4W ire break in software 0 = no, 1 = yes (only for 4 to 20mA) 0 | 1
5 –– 0
6Measurement underrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (underflow) 0 | 1
7Measurement overrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (overflow) 0 | 1
09 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Byte AI2
0Parameter error in parameters for
channel 0 = no, 1 = yes *) 0 | 1
1..3 –– 000
4W ire break in software 0 = no, 1 = yes (only for 4 to 20mA) 0 | 1
5 –– 0
6Measurement underrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (underflow) 0 | 1
7Measurement overrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (overflow) 0 | 1
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
T able 10-2 Structure of the Diagnostic Area
Byte Value
Range
ExplanationMeaningBit
10 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Byte AI3
0Parameter error in parameters for
channel 0 = no, 1 = yes *) 0 | 1
1..3 –– 000
4W ire break in software 0 = no, 1 = yes (only for 4 to 20mA) 0 | 1
5 –– 0
6Measurement underrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (underflow) 0 | 1
7Measurement overrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (overflow) 0 | 1
11 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Byte AI4
0Parameter error in parameters for
channel 0 = no, 1 = yes *) 0 | 1
1..3 –– 0
4W ire break in software 0 = no, 1 = yes (only for 4 to 20mA) 0 | 1
5 –– 0
6Measurement underrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (underflow) 0 | 1
7Measurement overrange 0 = no, 1 = yes (overflow) 0 | 1
12 0..7 Channel type AO of the following channel-specific diagnostic information 73H
13 0..7 Number of analog output channels
on module 4
14 0..7 Number of diagnostic bits per
channel 1
15 Channel Vector for Channel Group AO
0Collective error in AO1 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
1Collective error in AO2 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
2Collective error in AO3 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
3Collective error in AO4 0 = no, 1 = yes 0 | 1
4..7 –– 0000
*) Analog inputs will be reset until the channel functions again.
(Exception: parameter assignment for wire-break check for
setting <>4...20 mA) AI=7FFFH
**) Analog output will be reset until channel functions again
AO=0V 0 mA
****) No hardware interrupt, no diagnostic interrupt, no disturbance on the
bit 0 of byte 0 =0
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
10.3 Dependencies and Reactions of the Diagnostic Evaluation
The diagnostic entries are interdependent. For example, the message for the
error “wire break” can only become effective if the diagnostic entries
“external error” and “channel error” are set simultaneously.
These dependencies are illustrated in Table 10-3.
T able 10-3 Dependencies and Reactions of the Error Entries
Byte 0 / Bit 0 = 1 Module error
Byte 0 / Bit 1 = 1 Internal error
Byte 2 / Bit 3 = 1 Watchdog (R)
Byte 3 / Bit 2 = 1 EEPROM error (R)
Byte 3 / Bit 4 = 1 ADC error (M/R) (R)
Byte 0 / Bit 2 = 1 External error
Byte 0 / Bit 3 = 1 Channel error
Byte 7 Evaluate channel vector if req.
Wire break
Byte 8, 9, 10, 11: Bit 4 = 1 channel-specific diagnostic
byte AI (E/P)
Underrange
Byte 8, 9, 10, 11: Bit 6 = 1 channel-specific diagnostic
byte AI (E/P/M)
Overrange
Byte 8, 9, 10, 11: Bit 7 = 1 channel-specific diagnostic
byte AI (E/P/M)
Byte 0 / Bit 7 = 1 Incorrect parameters
Byte 8,9,10,11 / Bit 0 = 1 channel-specific diagnostic byte AI (P)
Byte 15 / Bit 0 = 1 Collective error AO (only parameter error
possible) (P)
Byte 0 / Bit 6 = 1 Module not assigned parameters
Legend: E = temporary, can be removed by hand at connection
P = permanent, can be reset by assigning correct parameters
R = permanent, can be removed by RESET (memory reset and
complete restart of C7 CPU) or by exchanging equipment
M = temporary, disappears after new measurement
Overview
Dependency of
Error Entry
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The diagnostic messages listed in Table 10-4 refer to Table 10-3.
Table 10-4 lists the diagnostic messages and also possible reactions of the
user.
T able 10-4 Diagnostic Messages and Reaction Possibilities
Reason for the
Diagnostic Message Source of Err or Reaction of the Module Possible Elimination
Module not
assigned
parameters
During the startup of the
module, if no parameters
were assigned by the
C7 CPU. The “module
fault” bit is not set if no
further error exists.
Report to C7 CPU that the
module is working with
default parameters (no
channel-specific module
diagnostics, no hardware
and diagnostic interrupts).
Assign parameters to
module
Module fault Group error of all set
diagnostic bits (except if the
message “module not
assigned parameters” is set)
The error is set/reset with the
subordinate diagnostic bits.
If the diagnostic interrupt
has been assigned, one will
be generated.
See error under the grouping
“module fault” (T able 10-3)
Internal error The error bit is set
simultaneously with the
error bits “W atchdog”,
“EEPROM error”, or “ADC
error”. In addition, the
watchdog is activated with
“EEPROM error”.
See error under the grouping
“Internal error” (T able 10-3)
Watchdog The watchdog error is
identified after an internal
reset of the module. The
watchdog error can arise as
the result of an EPROM or
general module error .
W ith watchdog, the module
adopts a safe state. 0 V is
output, the measured values
become 7FFFh and the
counter values become
FFFFh/FFFFFFh.
The error cannot be
corrected by the user .
The module can only be
restarted after a reset on the
bus (restart C7 CPU).
EEPROM error The error is identified after
resetting the module during
the reading of the
calibration values for the
compensation of the offset
error of the analog I/O from
the serial EEPROM.
The module adopts a safe
state. 0 V is output, the
measured values become
7FFFH and the counter
values become
FFFFH/FFFFFFH.
The error cannot be
corrected by the user .
The module can only be
restarted after a reset on the
bus (restart C7 CPU) or the
analog I/O must be
recalibrated at the
manufacturer ’ s factory
(equipment exchange).
External error The error bit is set when
channel-specific errors of
the analog inputs or outputs
occur.
Refer to the grouping
“External error” in T able
10-3.
See error under the grouping
“External error” in T able
10-3.
Channel error A channel caused an error .
Diagnosis of the channel
causing the error has been
enabled
Refer to the grouping
“External error” in T able
10-3.
See error under the grouping
“Channel error” in Table
10-3.
Reaction to
Diagnostic
Messages
I/O Dia
g
nostics
10-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
T able 10-4 Diagnostic Messages and Reaction Possibilities
Reason for the
Diagnostic Message Possible EliminationReaction of the ModuleSour ce of Error
W ir e br eak Requirement:
The measurement range
0 to 20 mA has been set for
the channel.
If a wire-break check has
been assigned, then the error
is identified by evaluation of
the input current of the
analog input channel (<1.6
mA).
An error counter will be
incremented. If the error
counter reaches a fixed value
of 3, then the error “wire
break” is reported.
Check the connection of the
appropriate measurement
channel.
Overflow The error is identified after
the comparison of the
measured value (incl.
correction calculation).
Measurement >=positive
overflow range.
The bit is set and reset again
when the measurement
decreases.
Check the connection of the
appropriate input channel or
transducer.
Underflow The error is identified after
the comparison of the
measured value (incl.
correction calculation).
Measurement >= negative
overflow range. That is
<0 mA for 4 to 20 mA.
The bit is set and reset again
when the measurement
becomes valid.
Check the connection of the
appropriate input channel or
transducer.
Incorrect
Parameters The error is identified when
checking the parameter after
reading and processing the
parameter area.
The measurement 7FFFH is
set in the incorrectly
configured measurement
channel and the
corresponding diagnostic bit
set or, for an output channel,
0 V /0 mA is output and the
corresponding bit set. If the
module had not been
assigned parameters and the
assignment is correct, then
the bit “incorrect parameter”
is reset and (if diagnostic
interrupt= yes) a diagnostic
interrupt reported to the C7
CPU.
Assign correct parameters.
Hardware Interrupt
Lost The module is sending more
interrupts than can be
processed by the CPU.
Bit 6 in byte 3 “hardware
interrupt lost” is set for at
least 500 ms, if no further
hardware interrupt is lost
during this time period.
Change parameter settings
for counter values
I/O Dia
g
nostics
11-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
11.1 Changing the Backup Battery
You must always change the backup battery during power on. This prevents
any data loss in the internal user memory while changing the battery.
Battery cover
Cable tie
Figure 1 1-1 Removing the Cover of the C7-633 DP
Figure 11-2 Battery Cover
Note
Observe the ESD guidelines. Do not use any metal objects (screwdriver)
inside the C7. Electrical components and printed circuit boards are not
sufficiently protected.
Change During
Power On Only
Maintenance
11-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Proceed as follows to change the backup battery:
1. Unscrew the cover of the C7 battery compartment (see Figure 11-1).
2. Lift the cover up and to the right (see Figure 11-2). Make sure you raise
the cover only as far as the battery connections allow.
3. Unplug the battery connector from the old backup battery (see Figure
11-3).
4. Loosen the cable ties with which the battery is attached to the cover (see
Figure 11-3).
5. Attach the new backup battery to the cover using the cable ties.
6. Plug the battery connector of the new battery into the two-pin plug
connector. The battery connector is coded to prevent it being plugged
incorrectly (see Figure 11-3).
7. Replace the battery cover on the C7 with the clips to the left and screw
the cover tight again.
Figure 1 1-3 Inserting the Backup Battery
We recommend that you change the battery every year.
Note
Observe the regulations or guidelines concerning the handling and disposal
of lithium batteries enclosed with the battery.
Store your backup batteries in a cool, dry place. Backup batteries can be
stored for up to five years.
Service Life of the
Backup Battery
Storage of Backup
Batteries
Maintenance
11-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
11.2 Replacing the C7
On-site repair of the C7 has not been provided for. For this reason, a
defective C7 must be replaced.
The following components must be available in order to replace a C7:
Hardware
SProgramming device/PC with MPI interface module
SConnection cable (MPI and RS 232/TTY)
Development tools
SSTEP 7
SProTool or ProTool/Lite
User software (stored outside the C7)
SOP configuration
SCPU user program (if data from the C7 CPU can no longer be read and no
memory card is inserted)
Dismantle the device in the opposite order to the installation. Proceed as
follows to remove the C7:
1. Connect a programming device/PC to the multipoint interface.
2. Use STEP 7 to save the user program on the C7 CPU to a programming
device/PC or remove the memory card on which the CPU user program is
stored.
If the C7 CPU is defective and the user program can no longer be read
out, remove the C7 without any further safety measures.
The configuration loaded on the C7 cannot be displayed. It must be available
on a programming device/PC.
Introduction
Requirement
Removal
Maintenance
11-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The mechanical and electrical installation is as described in Sections 2.2 and
2.3. Once you have obtained a new C7, install it as follows:
1. Connect a programming device/PC to the multipoint interface.
2. Perform a memory reset on the C7 CPU.
3. Without a memory card:
Transfer the previously saved CPU user program from the programming
device/PC with the relevant data to the C7 CPU (with STEP 7).
With a memory card:
Insert the memory card and perform another memory reset (MRES) on the
C7 CPU.
4. Connect the C7 operator panel to the serial interface of the programming
device/PC.
5. Load your configuration onto the C7 operator panel using ProTool or
ProTool/Lite.
6. Start the CPU user program (by selecting a CPU mode).
Installation
Maintenance
11-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Maintenance
A-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
System Messages
This chapter lists the most important system messages, when they occur and,
where applicable, how you can eliminate the error.
C7 system messages can be subdivided into various categories.
The information as to which category a system message belongs to is
contained in the message number as indicated below.
VVV Message text
Message number
0 Driver error
1 Startup message
2 Warning
3 Information message
4 Operator error
5 Other message
6 Configuration error
7 Internal error
The message category enables you to identify the general area in which the
cause of the fault is to be found.
Below you will find a selection of system messages listed together with
details of under what circumstances they occur and, where applicable, how
the cause of the fault can be eliminated.
Self-explanatory system messages are not included.
Note
System messages are displayed in the language selected in the configuration.
If the C7 does not have access to any configuration data, the messages are
displayed in English.
In This Chapter
Message number
A
A-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
In the case of all system messages that relate to “internal errors”, please
follow the procedure outlined below.
a) Switch off the C7 and then restart it again.
b) During startup, set the C7 to download mode, retransfer the configuration
and then restart the C7 again.
c) If the fault occurs again, please contact your nearest Siemens
representative. When doing so, please quote the number of the error that
has occurred and any variables referred to in the message.
Message Cause Remedy
Please wait Mode change in progress or recipe function
started
Ready for
transfer Waiting for data from programming device/PC
Data transfer Data transfer between programming device/PC
and C7 in progress
Firmware not
compatible The firmware can not be used for the current
configuration
EPROM
memory failure Memory module defective or internal
hardware fault Send unit for repair quoting details of error
message
RAM memory
failure
g
Flash memory
failure Memory module defective or transmission
error Retransfer configuration or send C7 for repair
Procedure for
“Internal Errors”
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Message Cause Remedy:
005 Internal error:
Error message returned if nothing configured for a system
message
006 Error during data transfer in download mode. Two
variables are transferred with this message which contain
information about the function in which the error has
occurred (variable 1) and the cause of the error
(variable 2).
Variable 1:
0 Initialize function
1 Receive data
2 Send data
3 Send message block
4 Terminate function
Variable 2:
1 Internal error
3 Timeout error
5 Parity error
6 Framing error
7 Overrun error
8 Break in line
9 Receive buffer overflow
10 Control character error when receiving
11 Logging error
Repeat data transfer after first checking the
physical connection if necessary.
026...029 Storage medium not ready , contains errors or status
undefinable. Reset hardware, remove then refit Flash
memory module or carry out hardware test.
030 Storage medium not initialized. Switch to download mode.
032 Error accessing module, Flash may not be supported or
initialized by incorrect C7. Check whether module is properly inserted
and compatible.
If restoring: repeat backup with correct C7.
033 Internal Flash memory initialized; configuration data
deleted, some recipe data preserved. Retransfer configuration.
034 Inserted submodule initialized, all stored data deleted. Retransfer configuration.
035 Size of selected recipe memory has been reduced. The reduced-size recipe memory can not be
used and all data records must be deleted.
The recipe memory is only initialized when
requested.
040 Driver error
If F AP is set, the character delay time setting may be too
short.
Check physical connection to PLC.
Alter character delay time.
041 Fault in connection to PLC.
Possible causes:
– Fault on the transmission link, e.g. connecting cable
defective
– Incorrect interface parameters set on C7 or on
communication partner.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
043 Data transfer error . A variable indicating the cause of the
fault is transferred with this message.
Variable:
0 Timeout error
1 Framing error (receiving)
2 Overrun error
3 Parity error
4 No connection established
5 Checksum error (receiving)
6 Unexpected characters received
7...11 Internal errors
12 Receive data block too lar ge
13 Memory area not available on PLC
Repeat the data transfer . Before doing so,
check the physical connection/configured
interface parameters if necessary.
044 Fault in connection to PLC.
Possible causes:
– Fault on the transmission link, e.g. connecting cable
defective
– Incorrect interface parameters set on C7 or on
communication partner.
045 No connection to PLC established. Set dif ferent CPU using the menu command
“System” and the “Parameters” button in the
dialog box which appears.
100 Restart due to RAM failure.
101 Restart following termination of COM-UNI mode.
103 Startup following cancellation of COM-UNI mode.
104 Transfer cancelled by operator . Connection with C7 is still
open, the C7 is waiting.
105 Fault resulting in wait message has been eliminated.
107 Restart following activation of COM-UNI mode.
108 C7 is in download mode.
109 Restart after change of operating mode from offline to
online.
110 C7 is in “normal” mode.
113, 114 PLC has been restarted.
115 Establishing logical link to PLC.
117 Connection to PLC is OK again following a fault.
119 Automatic restart.
120 Restart after change of S5/S7 protocol.
124 Restart following selection of different language.
130 Startup due to loop-through operation when online.
132 Startup due to loop-through operation when offline.
129 SINEC L1 or SINEC L2 parameter has been changed.
134 Restart due to offline operation.
136 PLC not responding. Check program sequence on PLC.
Check physical connection.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
138 Data block not available on PLC Set up relevant memory area.
200 Battery power no longer sufficient for internal data buffer
on C7.
Battery on memory card is discharged, data may no longer
be readable.
Replace battery.
Note:
Replace the battery while the unit is
switched on in order to prevent loss of data.
201 Hardware fault in timer . Send unit for repair .
202 Error reading date. Send unit for repair .
203 Error reading time. Send unit for repair .
204 Error reading day . Send unit for repair.
205 Printer not ready and internal storage of print jobs is no
longer possible. Make sure printer is ready or disable
message logging.
206 Printer not ready . Print job placed in temporary storage. Make sure printer is ready .
207 Buf fer printout or print screen function cancelled. Check printer , cable, and connectors.
210 Internal error
C7 co-ordination area not receivable during startup.
Press restart button.
212 Internal error
Bit for changing operating mode has been inverted
erroneously.
Restart C7.
213 Of fline mode not possible at present. Try changing of operating mode again later.
214 The job number sent by the PLC or configured in a
function field is too large. Check PLC program and configured screen.
217, 218 Overlapping specified/actual values. Check configuration of actual/specified
values in the process link.
219 Hardware fault: relay or port could not be set. Send unit for repair .
220 Print buf fer overflow due to overload. Logging not
possible. Messages have been lost.
221 Print buffer overflow due to overload. Printout of
overflow messages not possible. Messages have been lost.
222 Warning: the event message buffer is full apart from the
specified remaining buffer space. Clear the buffer or configure a smaller size
for the remaining buffer space.
224 The event message buffer has overflowed. If a printer is connected and buffer overflow
has been configured, the overflow messages
will automatically be printed out.
225 Warning: the interrupt message buf fer is full apart from the
specified remaining buffer space. Clear the buffer or configure a smaller size
for the remaining buffer space.
227 The interrupt message buffer has overflowed. If a printer is connected and buf fer overflow
has been configured, the overflow messages
will automatically be printed out.
229 No keyboard connected (internal keyboard with ribbon
cable).
230 The minimum value is greater than the maximum value for
variable limits. Correct the limit settings.
231 The minimum value is equal to the maximum value for
variable scales. Correct the scale on the C7.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
250 You can not switch to the desired operating mode. Check parameters of PLC job.
251 Error transferring data record to PLC. Check recipe configuration.
252 Function can not be executed as a function of the same
group has not yet been completed (e.g.: setpoint entry is
active, password list can not be opened).
Wait until preceding function has been
completed (or terminate function) and then
call desired function again.
253 Access to data medium is not possible. 1. Floppy drive not present,
2. Floppy is read only,
3. Disk is not formatted.
254 The disk must be formatted before a data record can be
saved for the first time. First format the disk.
255 Not enough space on disk for this data record. Delete data records that are no longer
required.
256 Not enough system memory available to execute the
desired function. T ry activating function again. Check
configuration.
1. Move function to a dif ferent screen.
2. Simplify screen structure.
3. Do not use any trends on the screen
together with this function.
257 Data record has been stored with a different version stamp
than defined in the current configuration. If you are continuing to use the data records,
the old version number must be
entered in the recipe configuration.
Caution:
The structure of the recipe determines the
assignment of data to a data record.
258 A parameter record has been selected as a recipe.
Parameter records can not be edited directly . Only individual data records of a parameter
record can be edited.
259 Transfer of a data record to the PLC is taking too long.
Example:
PLC is not acknowledging data record or very large data
records are being transferred.
Check PLC program. In the case of large
data records no modifications are necessary
as the function is being processed correctly .
260 Operating mode of PLC does not match the configuration. Change operating mode of PLC.
261 The data in this data record are no longer consistent and it
can therefore no longer be used. Edit data record and check that all entries
are correct.
262 Password or query window already in use by another
function. Complete first function then execute desired
function again.
263 Specified remaining buf fer space for messages has been
reached. Configure smaller remaining buffer space,
clear event/interrupt message buffer .
264 Message buffer overflow . The overflow messages are printed out if so
specified in the configuration.
265 The number of passwords issued has already reached 50.
You can not enter any more passwords. If you wish to issue additional passwords,
you must first delete some of the existing
ones.
266 The field configured in the PLC job does not exist. Change the parameters of the PLC job and
retransfer the configuration.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
303 Fault in connection with PLC.
S5: this error may occur when transferring large data
records. In such cases the watchdog is activated.
Check PLC status.
S5: set value in data word 98 to at least
2000.
304 Illegal S5 job number or job parameters in a function field.
305 Data block number missing. Set up data block or change configuration.
306 Incorrect CPU specified under the menu command
“System,” “Parameters” button in the dialog box which
appears.
Change configuration and retransfer .
307 ...
311 Variable not present on PLC Check configuration of process link.
312 The printer is already processing a print job and cannot
accept this next job at present. Wait until the printer is free again and repeat
the print job.
313 Information message: print job completed.
314 S7 diagnostic buffer not present. The CPU has no diagnostic buffer
(hardware problem).
315 No information text available.
316 Active password level insuf ficient for menu item Enter password with higher password level.
317 Input is password-protected. Enter password.
318 Incorrect password entered when attempting to log in.
319 An existing password was entered when editing the
password. Enter a different password.
320 You have attempted to alter the level of the supervisor
password or to delete it.
321 You have attempted to alter the level of an invalid
password. First enter the password then specify the
level.
322 The password entered is too short. Password must be at least three characters
long.
323 You have pressed <– Statistics or Message Text –> on a
buffer screen but there is no entry for the current message. ––
324 The entry number specified does not exist on the selected
screen. ––
325 The FM/NC (= MPI partner) has no alarm message buffer. A node does not have the required
functional capability.
326 You have attempted to collect a recipe number other than
the active recipe number from the PLC. Select the appropriate recipe number .
327 Recipe number not present when selecting a recipe. Configure missing recipe or select a
different one.
328 Recipe number >99 when selecting a recipe.
329 The same number has been entered for source and
destination on the “Data Record Transfer” screen. Enter dif ferent numbers.
330 Full details of source and destination not entered when
initiating data record transfer function.
331 The data record specified as the source does not exist.
332 Data record number >99 when selecting a recipe screen.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
333 Data record number not present when selecting a recipe
screen.
335 Information message: alarm message will be suppressed.
336 No process screens have been configured.
337 No recipes have been configured.
338 C7 can not establish a connection to the printer . 1. Printer is not switched on.
2. Printer is not ready .
3. Connecting lead between printer <––>
C7 is not connected or defective.
4. No interface submodule inserted.
339 Startup completed. Communication with PLC has been
resumed.
340 Status processing in progress on programming device/PC.
The C7 cannot be used during this time.
341 Internal error
In the case of external connections:
data block error
342 Network node has illegal address. Max. addresses:
S7 MPI: 32
PROFIBUS DP: 128
343 You are attempting to edit a variable of a type that cannot
be edited in a recipe: currently applies to ARRAY
variables only.
350 PLC is performing initialization. You cannot enter any
setpoints during initialization. Scrolling of screens is
possible.
This operating mode may be set by the PLC
programmer.
351 PLC has completed initialization. You can resume entering
setpoints once this message has appeared.
352 You are attempting to select a screen that does not exist or
has been disabled by the function Hide.
353 The minimum value is greater than the maximum value for
variable scales. Minimum and maximum values are being
confused by C7. To prevent this, enter
correct minimum and maximum values.
354 You are attempting to enter a value in an input field when
the current password level is insufficient for input. Log on with a higher password level.
355 Entry of this variable has not been configured for the
current PLC mode.
356 A print function has been initiated on the C7. When
attempting to print it has been ascertained that the printer is
offline.
Switch the printer online.
Check the connection between the C7 and
the printer.
Has the printer been connected to the correct
interface?
357 You are attempting to enter a setpoint that contains an
illegal character. Enter a correct value.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
358 The C7 is currently executing a function which does not
permit use of the C7 while it is in progress. Wait until the function has been completed.
This message may appear in the case of
recipe functions, for example.
359 The CPU is in STOP mode. System error message issued if S7 messages
are not available.
365 Incorrect index. A multiplex index is outside the defined
range.
370 Hard copy printout has been cancelled manually .
371 Print function disabled at present.
372 The function started has been cancelled.
383 Information message: transfer of data records completed.
384 Data record required is not on data medium. Check the data record selection parameters
(recipe, data record name, data medium) or
use the Select function to select the data
record.
385 Information message: transfer of data records from C7 to
data medium or vice versa has been initiated. Possible reason why operation is not
possible:
the PLC has not reset the relevant
386 Information message: transfer of data records from C7 to
PLC or vice versa has been initiated.
t
h
e
PLC
h
as not reset t
h
e re
l
evant
control/checkback bit in the interface area
that unlocks the recipe mailbox.
387 Data record not found. There is no data record relating to the
selected recipe on the data medium.
388 Activating selected function.
389 De-activating selected function.
391 No Help text configured. Check configuration.
400 Illegal key pressed.
401 Value entered could not be converted.
402 Operator error on STATUS VAR or FORCE VAR screen. Only 10 entries are permitted (after pressing
INS if 10th line already used).
403 Incorrect time entered.
404 Incorrect date entered.
406 Operator error on STATUS VAR or FORCE VAR screen. Values can only be changed after update
operation has been cancelled (BREAK key).
407 You have attempted to delete the only data record for a
recipe.
409 Lower limit violated: you have attempted to enter a
setpoint that is below the configured lower limit. Enter a value that is greater than or equal to
the specified value. No limit is indicated for
data of the type DOUBLE.
410 Upper limit violated: you have attempted to enter a
setpoint that is above the configured upper limit. Enter a value that is less than or equal to the
specified value. No limit is indicated for
data of the type DOUBLE.
411 Illegal screen selection because incorrect PLC type
specified (external driver) Change configured interface parameter .
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
442 Data block error x DB no. y
This message indicates a data block error . The variables x
and y identify the cause of the fault (x) and the number of
the receive block concerned (y).
Variable x:
0 Incorrect block length entered in receive block no. y
1 Incorrect block number entered in receive block no. y
Correct the block length/block number as
necessary or send the correct data block.
450 When entering a value, you have attempted to press a key
that is not compatible with the defined input field.
451 You have entered a setpoint that is below the configured
lower limit. Enter a value that is greater than or equal to
the limit.
452 You have entered a setpoint that is above the configured
upper limit. Enter a value that is less than or equal to the
limit.
453 Time not entered correctly . Enter time correctly.
454 Interface parameters incorrectly set, e.g. when specifying
parameters for printer interface Enter valid value for interface parameters.
The following values are valid:
– Transmission rate: 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
– Data bits: 5,6,7,8
– Stop bits: 1,2
– Timeout: 1...600
455 You have set graphics printing on the C7 but the
corresponding ESC sequence has not been configured. Select a different printer or check printer
configuration in ProTool.
456 You have entered an incorrect value, e.g. a variable with a
user function that blocks certain input values. Enter permissible value.
458 You have entered a value that is too great or too small for
the variable type concerned, e.g. a value greater than
32767 for a variable of the type Integer .
Enter a value that is within the permissible
range.
459 You are attempting to enter an illegal character (e.g. letter
in a numerical value) The input is rejected and the existing
entry retained.
Enter permissible value.
500...503 Cyclic interrupt, counter , date or time data can not be sent. This error can occur if the PLC is
il l d d if h f i
504 Free ASCII protocol: operator input value could not be
sent.
temporarily overloaded or if the function
block is not called for more than 1.5 s.
505 The data record can not be sent as the recipe disable bit on
the PLC is set or because transfer of a recipe is still in
progress.
Try sending again later when the PLC has
released the recipe mailbox.
506 Overload: too many message blocks with the same block
number in transit. This error occurs if the PLC sends too many
jobs using ’collect message area’ within a
certain period of time.
507 Transfer of the data record was not acknowledged by the
PLC within a certain period. Checking of data records by the user at the
PLC end must be carried out more quickly
(< 10 s).
509 Firmware version is dif ferent from standard FB version. Please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
510 Data record not present. A process link with a non-existent data
block has been configured in a recipe or the
recipe data contain errors.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
511 You have used a PLC job to select a recipe or a request
data record that does not exist.
512 Configured data block length is too short.
The variable transferred with the message identifies the
number of the data block.
Change configuration and retransfer .
516 SINEC L2 protocol configured but no interface
submodule inserted. Change configuration and retransfer .
518 Interface submodule inserted and protocol configured do
not match. Change configuration and retransfer .
520 Excessive number of saved returns has meant that
maximum nesting level has been exceeded. Go to Message Level (by pressing ESC key
if necessary).
521, 522 Screen can not be constructed or selected because there is
not enough memory available.
Message 522 triggers a restart with memory optimization.
You can optimize memory availability by
1. Removing unused fields from the
configuration.
2. Configuring the screen with fewer
fields, or splitting it into more than one
screen.
3. Creating fewer recipe data records.
523 No text found.
524 Object class does not exist.
525 Illegal address.
526 Loop-through operation is set on the C7. Change mode from “Loop-through
operation” to “Normal operation”.
527 Access to recipe data is not possible at present.
528 Recipe does not exist.
529 File does not exist.
530 Data record not present.
531 Data record can not be loaded.
532 Information message: data record memory is full.
533 Floppy connection unclear .
534 Information message: disk is full.
535 Disk access error.
536 Disk transfer error. Check the physical connection.
537 Information message: disk is blank.
538 Simultaneous accessing of data record by job and operator . Repeat uncompleted accessing operation.
539 The data records in the RAM for recipe no. x contained
errors and have been deleted. If data records are stored in the Flash
memory they will remain valid.
540 The maximum number of data records has already been
created.
541 ...
550 Specified variable not available on PLC. Change configuration and retransfer .
551 An MPI/PPI connection to the PLC cannot be established
using the specified station address. Check MPI station addresses and wiring.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
552 Query: safety check as to whether the selected data record
is to be deleted. The data record is only deleted if 0 is
entered. If not the function is cancelled.
This query is also used when backing up or
restoring configurations. In that case, it
relates to deletion of all data records in the
system memory.
553 Information message: selected data record has been
deleted.
554 Query: 1st safety check as to whether the data medium for
storing data records is to be formatted. Any data records
already on the disk will be deleted when the function is
executed! The function is only executed if 0 is entered.
555 Query: 2nd safety check as to whether the data medium for
storing data records is to be formatted. Any data records
already on the disk will be deleted when the function is
executed! The function is only executed if 0 is entered.
556 Information message: disk has been formatted.
557 Query: if 0 is entered the data record will be adopted with
the new values. If anything else is entered, you may
continue editing.
558 Query: if 0 is entered the edited data record is rejected. The
data remain as they were before editing. If anything else is
entered, you may continue editing.
559 Query as to whether the event message buffer should be
cleared.
560 Query as to whether the alarm message buffer should be
cleared.
561 Information message: appears if a global data record (V3.0
or later) is edited and not all entries that are defined in the
current recipe are completed. The data record can only be
saved if the marked entries are edited. If no entries are
marked, only the version number has changed.
Only returned in the case of data records
that are transferable from one recipe to
another. Missing entries are marked and
must be edited. Editing can, however, be
cancelled at any time.
562 Information as to which mode was set using the function
“First/Last Message”.
563 Information as to which mode was set using the function
“First/Last Message”.
564 Query: if 0 is entered the data record is created. If anything
else is entered, the function is cancelled.
565 Query: if during transfer of a global data record it is found
that not all entries are present, the missing entries can be
– read by the PLC if 1 is entered, or
– edited if 2 is entered
If 3 is entered, transfer is cancelled.
Only returned in the case of data records
that are transferable from one recipe to
another. (V3.0 or later, plastic functions.)
566 Data record contains array that does not fit the current
recipe structure. The following question appears:
Save yes/no?.
If you elect to save, the array data are set to
0.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
567, 568 If the message buf fer has to be cleared, pending
event/alarm messages also have to be deleted in order to
make space for new message events.
Check configuration. T oo many messages
are pending.
569 Fault on CPI submodule. – CPI no.: defective CPI submodule
– Error:
1 = Voltage too low
2 = Current too high
3 = Temperature too high
4 = Module not present (failed during
operation)
570 Variable contains errors: variable name from ProT ool is
used as parameter. Check configuration. Frequently occurs
with NC variables and when multiplexing.
571 S7 system diagnosis/INTERRUPT_S returns error if C7
logs on/off. CPU operating system out of date.
572 Query: data record already exists on data medium. If 0 is entered the data record will be
overwritten with the new values.
600 Configuration error: overflow warning at basic setting 1
601 Configuration error: message logging at basic setting 1
602 Configuration of remaining buffer space incorrect. Correct the remaining buffer space and
retransfer configuration.
604 Message does not exist. Configure message.
605 Process link is only configured symbolically . Change configuration and retransfer.
606 T oo many message variables configured.
gg
607 Data type configured does not exist.
608 The process screen number does not exist.
609 Special object or operator object for message text does not
exist or is not permissible.
610 Operator object for header or footer does not exist or is not
permissible. If the fault is not corrected by performing a
restart, please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
611 Special operator object for buf fer printout does not exist or
is not permissible.
,p
613 Data block not available or too short. Create data block of required length on the
PLC.
614 No entry present for log (header and footer not present). Configure log fully .
615 The line to be output is larger than the amount of print
memory reserved for it or the number of control sequences
is too great.
Check configuration as regards logging.
616 Internal error
Incorrect data format in process link.
Correct the data format.
617 Internal error
Incorrect word length in process link.
Correct the word length.
618 Configuration error in actual control value (bit number >
15). Bit number for actual control variable must
be < 15.
619 Error presetting setpoint (error in data structures). Change configuration and retransfer.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
620 Illegal keyboard ID: submodule number too high or
number of keys does not match keyboard ID. Enter configuration to match hardware.
621 Incorrect parameter transferred: message type Set required value by way of standard
screen or PLC.
622 Configured recipe does not fit in recipe mailbox on PLC
(> 512 data words). Reduce configured size of recipe and
retransfer configuration.
623 Internal error
Screen object for “Send Recipe“ is not a recipe type (fixed
by COM TEXT).
If the fault is not corrected by performing a
restart, please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
624 No recipe entries found. Set up area pointers and retransfer
configuration.
625 Recipe number does not exist. Reconfigure recipe.
626 No setpoints have been configured.
gp
627 Internal error
Configured keyboard block number too high.
Correct the block number .
628 Recipe does not fit in mailboxes. Increase configured size of recipe mailbox
or succeeding recipe mailbox.
629 LED image area too small. Increase size of LED image area according
to bit numbers used.
630 Keyboard image area too small. Increase size of keyboard image area
according to bit numbers used.
631 Message configuration incomplete or incorrect.
Variable x:
1, 2 Alarm message triggered not configured.
3 Process link only created symbolically .
4 Actual value field only created symbolically .
5, 6 Event message triggered not configured.
7 Symbolic actual value field only created
symbolically.
21..24 Field texts for symbolic actual value do not exist.
25 Illegal field type.
8..20 Internal error.
Complete configuration.
If the fault is not corrected by performing a
restart, please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
632 Configuration error:
Variable x:
1, 4 Information text does not exist
2 Information text ID for messages does not exist
3, 6..8, Internal error
11, 13
5 Field only created symbolically
9 Screen or recipe entry only created symbolically
12 Process screen or recipe contains no entries
Check the configuration. If the fault is not
corrected by performing a restart, please
contact the SIMATIC Hotline.
634 Configuration error:
Variable x:
0..8, 34Internal error
18 Screen or recipe title not configured
Screen or recipe title not configured. If the
fault is not corrected by performing a restart,
please contact the SIMATIC Hotline.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-15
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
635 Configuration error:
Variable x:
1 Screen or recipe entry only created symbolically .
3 Field only created symbolically.
6 Message, entry or information text not configured
for current language.
7...9, Internal error.
19, 28,
41...43
18 Screen or recipe title not configured.
20 Process link only created symbolically .
21 Information text only created symbolically .
22 Symbolic field only created symbolically .
23 Fewer than 2 field texts configured for symbolic
field.
24 Current field type for symbolic field not
configured.
25 Illegal data format for symbolic field (only KF and
KY permissible).
26 Recipe setpoint configured with data format KC.
33 Illegal data format for setpoint field.
35 Data format for cyclic interrupt too short.
36 Illegal data format for actual control value.
44 If specific reference to menu: menu item not
present.
45 If specific reference to screen: Entry or field
number does not exist.
46 Too many actual control values on screen
(max. 200 permitted).
48 Too many fields on process screen.
50 Process link for soft keys does not exist.
51 Soft key number too high.
53 Information text for soft key not configured or not
configured in all languages.
55 Soft key specified in entry does not exist.
Check the configuration. If the fault is not
corrected by performing a restart, please
contact the SIMATIC Hotline.
636 Event message is not configured Configure event message (–> message
b)fll
637 Missing configuration for an event message
gg(g
number) fully .
638, 639 Actual value field for event message has only been created
symbolically.
640 Alarm message is not configured Configure alarm message (–> message
641 Alarm message triggered is not configured
gg(g
number) concerned.
642, 643 The actual value field for alarm message has only been
created symbolically. Reconfigure interrupt message (–> message
number).
645 Internal error
PLC co-ordination area is not receivable during startup.
Press key to restart. If the fault is not
corrected by performing a restart, please
contact the SIMATIC Hotline.
648 The driver number configured cannot be interpreted.
649 Internal error
Driver number configured cannot be interpreted.
If the fault is not corrected by performing a
restart, please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
650 Missing area pointer. Configure an area pointer .
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-16 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
651 Internal error
There is not at least one data record for every recipe.
If the fault is not corrected by performing a
restart, please contact the SIMA TIC Hotline.
652 Configuration is not compatible with S5. Change configuration and retransfer . If the
fault is not corrected by performing a restart,
please contact the SIMATIC Hotline.
653 The configured user version number does not match the
version number stored on the PLC. Change configuration and retransfer .
654 The PLC acknowledgement area has not been configured
to follow on physically from the message area.
655 PLC acknowledgement area does not physically follow on
from the alarm message area (–> no startup).
656 Configured protocol is not possible. Check protocol in configuration.
657 Configured PLC protocol is not possible. Use current firmware version or configure
different protocol.
658 Configured PLC protocol is not possible.
659 Illegal process link in recipe, destination does not exist. Change configuration and retransfer .
660 Invalid destination configured for return reference in
menu. Break key on C7; complete configuration
and retransfer
661 On process screen: recipe setpoint or previous value
configured in recipe: field is neither recipe setpoint or
previous value.
Change field type or remove field and
retransfer configuration
662 Invalid destination configured for return reference in
screen. Change configuration and retransfer .
663 Data record memory full (during startup)
664 Standard data records for the configured recipes require
more than 20 Kbytes. Unit switches to COM TEXT mode. Configure fewer or smaller recipes.
665 Configuration of interfaces incorrect,
printer/PLC interfaces have same physical characteristics. Check interface parameters.
667 Configuration error:
Variable x:
1 Data type is not DB
2 DB number is greater than 15
3 DB length is greater than 1024
4 DW is in data block header
5 Actual value not in send block
6 Setpoint not in receive block
7 Setpoint/actual value not in receive block
8 Initial value not in send block
9 Data type is not DB
10 DB number is greater than 15
11 DB length is greater than 1024
12 DW is in data block header
13 Area is in wrong DB
14 Sum of data blocks too great
x = 1..8: Change the configuration of the
process link and retransfer .
x = 9..13:Change configuration of area
pointer and retransfer.
x = 14: Restrict configuration and
retransfer.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-17
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
668 Incorrect configuration.
Meaning of variables:
1: Incompatible PLC types configured.
2: No PLC configured.
3: Incorrect transmission rate configured.
Change configuration and retransfer .
669 Too many actual values (> 512) have been configured for
cyclic reading in a screen/variable.
670 T oo many variables requested simultaneously . Lengthen standard clock pulse or configure
fewer variables on screen.
671 Configuration of message variables incompatible.
Dif ferences between configuration and PLC. Check S7 programs.
Check message server configuration.
672 Message not configured.
Check
message
server
configuration
.
Change configuration and retransfer .
681 Overload caused by too many variables (setpoints/actual
values).
Fault in connection between the C7 and PLC.
Check the interface parameters.
682 Incorrect interface parameters configured. Configure fewer process links for the screen
displayed.
683 Configuration error:
upper limit = lower limit
Correct the limits and retransfer
configuration.
684 Non-existent trend switch buffer requested. Check PLC program/C7 configuration.
Only use trend request area 2 for trends with
switch buffer.
685 Illegal job issued to send task for parallel interface.
701 Internal error
Incorrect assignment of “head –> res“ when receiving
variable.
702 Job can not be executed. Change interface or configure area pointer .
703 Flash memory full. Restrict the configuration.
704 Incorrect CPU specified under the menu command
“System,” “Parameters” button in the dialog box which
appears.
Change configuration and retransfer .
705 An acknowledged message cannot be entered in the buffer
because the corresponding message or a message in the
same acknowledgement group is missing.
706 Recipe request will not be processed as another request is
already active.
707 Internal error
S7 message task error .
708 Internal error
Incorrect mailbox type.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-18 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
709 Internal error
Invalid mailbox type.
710 Internal error
Incorrect operating mode.
711 Internal error
Display status invalid.
712 No submenu configured.
713 Internal error
No special operator object configured.
714 Internal error
Menu number invalid.
715 Internal error
Mailbox type of received message is incorrect.
716 Internal error
The setting for the maximum number of messages is too
high (variable overflow).
717 Internal error
Incorrect message status when entering in statistics.
718 Internal error
Incorrect message status when entering in event message
buffer.
719 Internal error
Incorrect message status when entering in alarm message
buffer.
720 Internal error
Error reading messages from message buffer.
721 Internal error
Configuration message error.
722 Internal error
Incorrect mailbox type received (OP15 –> OP5)
723 Internal error
OP5: more than 500 messages are specified in the area
pointer lists.
Change area pointer list.
724 Internal error
Mailbox type not implemented.
725 Internal error
Block number does not exist.
726 Internal error
Incorrect mailbox type.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-19
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
727 Internal error
Illegal screen type.
728 Internal error
Return reference number incorrect.
729 Internal error
Error in internal mailbox buffer management for direct
message logging.
731 Internal error
Transfer parameter LEDSTATUS is incorrect in RIO
function “Change LED Status”.
732 Internal error
Key number can not be higher than 7/15/23
(8-key/16-key/24-key keyboard).
733 Internal error
Key number must be less than 4 as a maximum of 4 keys
is possible.
734 Internal error
The submodule number must be 0.
735 Internal error
Illegal RIO function.
The following are permissible: Read, Write
(LEDs, outputs) and Initialize.
736 Internal error
Keyboard driver error .
737 Internal error
Too many keyboard image areas (mailboxes) being
transferred to PLC.
738 Internal error
Mailbox type of received message is incorrect.
739 Internal error
Key acknowledgement received when message already
acknowledged.
740 Internal error
Message status not permitted for first alarm/event message.
741 Internal error
Buf fer type dif ferent from event or alarm message buffer.
742 Internal error
Message type different from event or alarm message
buffer.
743 Internal error
Configuration message error.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-20 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
744 Internal error
Incorrect mailbox type received.
746 Internal error
Actual control value and process link are identical on a
screen.
In COM TEXT: change address.
747 Internal error
Buf fer type dif ferent from event or alarm message buffer.
748 Internal error
Message type different from event or alarm message
buffer.
749 Internal error
Error in data structure of a buffer function screen.
750 Internal error
Error in data structure of the password function screen.
751 Internal error
Error in data structure of screen for setting time.
752 Internal error
Error in data structure of the Login screen.
753 Internal error
Error in data structure of other type of function screen.
In COM TEXT : IHV recipes af fected.
754 Internal error
Error in data structure of “Average Statistics” screen.
759 Internal error
Error group (task ID) does not exist.
760 Internal error
The message number for this error group does not exist.
761 Internal error
Communication: mailbox type of received message is
incorrect.
762 Internal error
Configuration error: message for which there is no text
expected. 761 received instead.
Occurs if, for example, new firmware is
being used with old COM TEXT version.
763 Internal error
Configuration error.
764, 765 Internal error
There are two variables:
Var.1: for the message number, Var .2: a number for the
error location
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-21
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Remedy:CauseMessage
767, 769,
771 Internal error
W ith stop, TD10 - TD/OP20 dif ferent.
772 Internal error
Communication error (–> Message frames).
774 Internal error
Error reading area pointer .
776 Internal error
Data record memory full.
777 Internal error
T oo many cyclic interrupts in transit.
780 Internal error
Internal error during MPI download; possibly due to
buffer problems.
Reset and repeat MPI download.
781 Internal error
Undefined error from communication with PLC.
782 An “Online Setter” function has been incorrectly defined
in ProTool.
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
A-22 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
S
y
stem Messa
g
es
B-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Technical Specifications for the C7
This chapter lists the technical specifications of the C7.
These technical specifications include the standards and test values that the
C7 conforms to or the criteria against which the C7 has been tested.
Section Description Page
B.1 Technical Specifications B-2
B.2 Notes on the CE Marking B-11
B.3 Notes for Machine Manufacturers B-12
B.4 Transport and Storage Conditions for Backup Batteries B-13
What are the
Technical
Specifications?
Chapter
Overview
B
B-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
B.1 Technical Specifications
General Technical
Specifications C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Order number 6ES7633-2BF00-0AE3 6ES7634-2BF00-0AE3 6ES7633-1DF00-0AE3 6ES7634-1DF00-0AE3
Dimensions
•Device (B x H x D)
•Cutout (B x H) 240 x 203.5 x 74.4 mm
231 x 159 mm 240 x 203.5 x 89.4 mm
231 x 159 mm
Weight 1600 g 1700 g 1800 g 1900 g
Safety of electrical equipment
•Standards
•Protection against foreign
particles and water
EN 61131-2 according to IEC 1131-2
Front: IP 65 according to IEC 529
Housing: IP 20 according to IEC 529
•Fire safety According to UL 94
Plug connectors V2
Basic connectors in
housing
Housing/front
V0
V0
Acceptance tests, certification EN 61131-2 (IEC 1131-2)
UL Listing UL 508
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) acc. to Standard C22.2 Number 142
FM approval, FM standards No. 361 1, 3600, 3810 Class I, Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D
ISO 9001 certification of manufacture and development
Operational ambient
temperature
•when mounted vertically
through 455
•when mounted horizontally
through 455
tested to IEC 68-2-1, IEC 68-2-2
±0 to +50°C
±0 to +45°C
•storage/transport -20°C to +70°C
Relative humidity
•operation
•storage/transport
tested to IEC 68-2-3
5 to 95 % at 25°C (no moisture condensation)
5 to 95 % at 25°C (no moisture condensation)
Air pressure
•operation
•storage/transport 795-1080 hPa (corresponds to -1000 m to +2000 m)
660-1080 hPa (corresponds to -1000 m to +3500 m)
Isolation --- yes, digital inputs/outputs, analog inputs/
outputs (not for universal inputs)
500 V DC
Supply voltage
•rated voltage (VN)
•permissible range
Safety extra-low voltage, SELV
24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 30.2 VDC
Note:
The C7 has no integrated protection against high-energy glitches in ms range (surges).
•polarized input voltage
•open circuit
(can be jumpered)
yes
≥ 20 ms
•current consumption (IN)
typ. / max.
•power loss 550 mA / 1A
12 W
Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC)
•Limit class for emitted
interference Class B to EN55022 (corresponds to CISPR 22)
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7-634 PC7-633 PC7-634 DPC7-633 DPGeneral Technical
Specifications
•Conducted interference on
voltage supply lines ±2kV to IEC 1000-4-4; burst
±1kV to IEC 1000-4-5; µs-pulse / line to line *)
±2kV to IEC 1000-4-5; µs-pulse / line to ground *)
*) with protection element lightning conductor KT Type 24 VAD from “Dehn” firm
•Immunity to interference on
signal lines ±2kV at IEC 1000-4-4; burst
•Immunity to discharge +6kV, contact dischar ge, to IEC 1000-4-2; ESD
+ 8 kV, air discharge, to IEC 1000-4-2; ESD
•Immunity to high-
frequency radiation 10V with 80% amplitude modulation with 1KHz
10KHz to 80MHz, to IEC 1000-4-6
10V/m with 80% amplitude modulation with 1KHz
80KHz to 80MHz, to IEC 1000-4-3
10V/m pulse-modulated 50% ED with 900MHz, to EN 50140
Mechanical loading
•Vibration tested to IEC 68-2-6
Tested with 10 to 58 Hz; amplitude 0.075 mm
58 to 500 Hz; acceleration 9.8 m/s2
Storage/transport 5 to 9 Hz; amplitude 3.5 mm
9 to 500 Hz; acceleration 9.8 m/s2
•Shock tested to IEC 68-2-29
Tested with semi-sinusoidal: 100 m/s2 (10 g), 16 ms; 100 shocks
Storage/transport semi-sinusoidal: 250 m/s2 (25 g), 6 ms; 1000 shocks
Backup battery Backup time approx. 1 year
Communication C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Communication functions
•PG/OP communication
•Global data
communication
•Basic communication
•Expanded communication
•S5-compatible
communication
•Standard communication
Number of connections
static/dynamic
yes
yes
yes
yes (Server)
yes
yes
4/8
Multipoint interface MPI yes, 2 nodes occupied per device (1x CPU, 1x OP)
•No. of nodes max. 32 nodes; programming device/PC, OP, S7-300;
per node max. 4 active connections to programming device/PC or OP
•Transfer rate max.
•Distance between 2
neighboring nodes 187.5 Kbps
without repeaters: 50 m
with 2 repeaters: 1100 m
with 10 repeaters in series: 9100 m
via fiber-optic cables: 23.8 km (with star coupler or OLM)
•Connectable
programming devices PG 720/720C, PG 740, PG 760, PC (AT) with MPI connection
•Guaranteed connections 1 for connection of programming device
1 for connection of operator panel
8 for program-controlled communication
•Free connections 2 for free programming device/OP program-controlled communication
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Communication C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
PROFIBUS DP interface
Integrated / external 1 / CP342-5 (via IM expansion) --- / CP342-5 (via IM expansion)
•Transfer procedure PROFIBUS DP to DIN 19245 Part 3
DP master / slave
•Transmission rate 12 Mbps
•Number of DP stations per
master (integrated or
external interface)
64
•Address area per DP station 122 bytes inputs and 122 bytes outputs, configurable in up to 32 address areas, max. 32 bytes
per address area
•Modules per ET200M 8
•Master or slave yes
Programming, Planning,
Configuration C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Programming, Configuration
(PLC)
•Programming software
•Programming languages STEP 7, STEP 7 Mini
STL, LAD, other languages optional
HMI configuration ProT ool, ProTool/Lite
Pr ogrammable Contr oller C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Main memory (1 instruction cor-
responds to approx. 3 bytes) 64 Kbytes / 20 K instruction RAM 48 Kbytes / 16 K instruction RAM
Load memory
•Integrated
•External max. 96 Kbytes RAM
512 Kbytes FEPROM (memory card)
Data backup with battery
without battery all data
max. 4736 bytes, can be configured for bit memory, timers, counters, data (max. 8 DBs, max.
4096 data bytes retentive in total)
Programming organization linear, structured
User program protection •Knowhow-protect
•Password protection
Instruction set Binary logic, bracketed commands, result assignment, save, count, load, transfer, compare,
shift, rotate, generate complement, call blocks, integer math instructions, floating-point math
instructions, jump functions
Types of blocks •Organization blocks (OB)
•Function blocks (FB)
•Functions (FC)
•Data blocks (DB)
•System functions (SFC)
•System function blocks (SFB)
No. of blocks max. 128 FCs, 128 FBs, or 127 DBs
Program processing •Startup (OB100)
•Free cycle (OB1)
•Real-time controlled (OB10)
•Time-driven (OB35)
•Interrupt-driven (OB40)
•Error handling (OB80, 81, 82, 85, 86, 87,
121, 122)
•As C7-633/634 DP, but without error
handling OB86
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7-634 PC7-633 PC7-634 DPC7-633 DPPr ogrammable Controller
System functions (SFC) Masking of interrupts, copying of data, real-time clock functions, diagnostic functions, error
handling, module parameter assignment
Block nesting depth 8 for each program execution level
Bracket levels 8
Execution times for
•Bit operations
•Word operations
•Time/counter operations
•Fixed-point addition
•Floating-point addition
0.3 µs (0.3 ms per 1000 binary instructions)
1 µs
12 µs
2 µs
50 µs
Cycle-time monitoring 150 ms (preset),
selectable 1 to 6000 ms
Bit memories
•Retentive with battery
•Retentive without battery
•Clock memory
2048
0 to 2047
0 to 2047, selectable
8 (1 memory byte),
freely selectable address of a memory byte (clock memory that can be used in the user
program)
Counters
•Retentive with battery
•Retentive without battery
•Counting range
64
0 to 63
0 to 63, selectable
1 to 999
Timers (are only updated in
OB1)
•Retentive with battery
•Retentive without battery
•Counting range
128
0 to 127
0 to 127, selectable
10 ms to 9990 s
Process image
•Digital inputs
•Digital outputs
0 to 127
I0.0 to Q127.7
Q0.0 to Q127.7
On-board interface module IM 360
Expansion with S7-300 modules max. 3-tier
S7-300 expansion modules max. 24
I/O expansions
•Digital inputs/outputs max.
•Analog inputs/outputs max.
768
192
Operable modules
FM
CP, point-to-point
CP, LAN
8
4
2
Clock Real-time clock (hardware clock)
Run-time meter
•Value range
•Granularity
•Retentive
0 to 32767 hours
1 hour
yes
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Human-machine interface
(HMI) C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Built-in configuration memory 128 Kbyte Flash 256 Kbyte Flash 128 Kbyte Flash 256 Kbyte Flash
Display STN LC display, LED backlighting
•Operating life of
backlighting approx. 100,000 h (approx. 11 years)
•Number of lines x
characters per line
•Line height
4 x 20
8 mm
4 x 20 / 8 x 40
selectable
11 mm / 6 mm
4 x 20
8 mm
4 x 20 / 8 x 40
selectable
11 mm / 6 mm
Keyboard
•Softkeys
•Function keys
Function keys that can be
configured as softkeys
•System keys
•Number of LEDs / of which
two-color LEDs
Membrane keyboard
4
16
6
24
32 / 16
Membrane keyboard
8
16
8
24
32 / 16
Membrane keyboard
4
16
6
24
32 / 16
Membrane keyboard
8
16
8
24
32 / 16
Event messages max. 499 999 499 999
•Event message buffer max. 256 entries
•Page event messages max. 256
Alarm messages 499 999 499 999
•Alarm message buffer max. 256 entries
No. of variables in message text max. 8
No. of displays 99
Entries per display 99
Recipes max. 99
•Recipe data memory 4 Kbytes 20 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 20 Kbytes
•Data records per recipe max. 99
•Entries per data record max. 99
Semi-graphics According to character set
Symbols/character sets 1
Dynamic objects Input, output, I/O fields, date/time fields, symbolic I/O fields
Online languages 3
Password levels 9
Clock Software clock Hardware clock Software clock Hardware clock
Load/printer interface RS 232 / TTY
Built-in inputs/outputs C7-633 DP C7-634 DP C7-633 P C7-634 P
Built-in digital inputs -16
Input voltage
•Rated value
•With signal “1”
•With signal “0”
24 V DC
11 to 30 V
-3 to 5 V
Isolation Yes, via optocouplers in groups of 16
Input delay typ./max. 3/4.8 ms
Input current with signal “1”
max. 11.5 mA
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7-634 PC7-633 PC7-634 DPC7-633 DPBuilt-in inputs/outputs
Connecting 2-wire Beros
•Permissible closed-circuit
current max. 2 mA
Cable lengths
•Unshielded
•Shielded 600 m
1000 m
Built-in digital outputs -16
Load rated voltage
•permissible range 24 V DC
20.4 to 28.8 V
Output voltage
•with signal “1” max. L + (-0.8 V)
Isolation Yes, via optocouplers, two groups of 8
Output current
•with signal ”1” rated value
minimum current
•with signal ”0” max.
0.5 A
5 mA
0.5 mA
Cumulative current per group of
8
•at 20 °C
•at 50 °C
4 A
2 A
Lamp load max. 5 W
Switching frequency
•under impedance load
•under inductive load 100 Hz
0.5 Hz
Limiting of voltage induced on
circuit interruption to L + (-48 V)
Short-circuit protection Yes, electronically clocked
Cable lengths
•Unshielded
•Shielded 600 m
1000 m
Built-in universal inputs -4
Can be used as
UI1 Digital/interrupt input 24 V DC
or up/down counter or
external gate counter
UI2 Digital/interrupt input 24 V DC
or up/down counter or
external gate counter
UI3 Digital/interrupt input 24 V DC
or up/down counter or
frequency/period duration counter or
external gate counter
UI4 Digital/interrupt input 24 V DC
Isolation No
Input voltage
•Rated value
•With signal ”1”
•With signal ”0”
24 V DC
11 to 30 V
-3 to 5 V
Input current with signal “1”typ. 2 to 8 mA
Cable lengths
•Unshielded
•Shielded 600 m
1000 m
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7-634 PC7-633 PC7-634 DPC7-633 DPBuilt-in inputs/outputs
Counter frequency max. 10 kHz
Counters max.
•Principle
•Count range C1/C2
•Count range C3
•Limit value (nominal)
default
•Count interrupt up counter
•Count interrupt
down counter
•Enable
3
Edge counting
up: 0 to 65535
down: 65535 to 0
up: 0 to 16777215
down: 16777215 bis 0
1 value per counter
On reaching the limit value
On reaching “0”
Within the program
Period duration counter max.
•Principle
•Count range
•Period duration max.
1
Counting fixed time units between two
positive edges
0 to 16777215
8.388 s or 0.119 Hz
Frequency counter max.
•Principle
•Count range
•Gate width
1
Counting pulses within a timer period
0 to 16777215
0.1 s; 1 s; 10 s (selectable)
External gate counter max.
•Principle
•Count range C1/C2
•Count range C3
3
Counting edges within a gate time via
external pin
0 to 216-1
0 to 224-1
Built-in analog inputs -4
Input range (selectable) / input
resistance
$ 10V/50 kΩ
$ 20 mA/105.5 Ω, 4 to 20 mA/105.5 Ω
Permissible input voltage for
voltage input max. 30 V
Permissible input current for
current input max. 30 mA
Isolation Yes, shared with A0
Cycle time (all channels) 2 ms
Conversion time per channel 0.5 ms
Resolution 12 bits incl. sign
Operational limit (over entire
temperature range, with
reference to input range)
•Voltage
•Current
$ 0.8 %
$ 0.8 %
Basic error limit (operational
limit at 25 °C, with reference to
input range)
•Voltage
•Current
$ 0.6 %
$ 0.6 %
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C7-634 PC7-633 PC7-634 DPC7-633 DPBuilt-in inputs/outputs
Interrupts
•Hardware interrupts
As cyclic interrupt
As end-of-cycle interrupt
•Diagnostic interrupt
•Interrupt cycle
Yes, configurable
Yes, configurable
Overranging, open-circuit detection at 4 to 20
mA with software
Yes, configurable
Cable length, shielded max. 200 m
Built-in analog outputs -4
Output range
•Voltage output
•Current output
$ 10 V
$ 20 mA
Load impedance
•For voltage outputs min.
•For current outputs max.
•For capacitative load max.
•For inductive load max.
2 kΩ
0.5 kΩ
1 µF
1 mH
Voltage output
•Short-circuit protection
•Short-circuit current Yes
25 mA
Current output
•No-load voltage max. $ 15 V
Isolation Yes, shared with AI
Resolution 12 bits incl. sign
Cycle time (all channels) Type 2 ms max. 4 ms
Transient recovery time
•For resistive load max.
•For capacitative load max.
•For inductive load max.
0.1 ms
3.3 ms
0.5 ms
Applicable substitute values Yes, configurable
Operational limit (0 to 60 °C,
with reference to output range)
•Voltage
•Current $ 0.8 %
$ 1 %
Basic error limit (operational
limit at 25 °C, with
reference to output range)
•Voltage
•Current
$ 0.5 %
$ 0.6 %
Interrupts
•Diagnostic interrupt Yes, configurable
for parameter error
Cable length, shielded max. 200 m
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The whole 24-VDC power supply for the C7 (operating voltage, load voltage,
relay power supply etc.) must be provided in the form of safety extra-low
voltage (SELV).
!Warning
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
If you do not provide the correct 24-VDC power supply for your C7, this
may result in damage to components of your programmable controller or
injury to personnel.
Use only safety extra-low voltage (SELV) for the 24-VDC power supply to
your C7.
If the device carries any of the following markings, the respective approval
has been obtained:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to UL 508 standard
UL Recognition Mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to standard C 22.2. No 142
FM
APPROVED
FM Standards No. 3611, 3600, 3810 APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D indoor hazardous
locations.
24-VDC Power
Supply
Important for the
USA and Canada
FM Approval
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-11
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
B.2 Notes on the CE Marking
The product meets the requirements of EU Directive 89/336/EEC
“Electromagnetic Compatibility.”
In accordance with the above-mentioned EU Directive, Article 10 (1), the EU
declarations of conformity and the relevant documentation are held at the
disposal of the competent authorities at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS E4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Federal Republic of Germany
The C7-633 and C7-634 control systems have been designed for use in the
following areas in accordance with their CE marking:
Ar ea of Use Requir ements
Emitted interference Immunity
Industrial environment EN 50081-2: 1993 EN 50082-2: 1995
Residential, commercial, light
industry EN 50081-1: 1992 EN 50082-1: 1992
SIMATIC products meet the requirements if you observe the installation
guidelines described in the manual when installing and operating the
equipment.
EU EMC Directive
89/336/EEC
Areas of Use
Observing the
Installation
Guidelines
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-12 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
B.3 Notes for Machine Manufacturers
The SIMATIC programmable controller is not a machine as defined in the EU
Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity for
SIMATIC with regard to the EU Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.
The EU Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC regulates requirements relating to
machinery. A machine is defined here as an assembly of linked parts or
components (see also EN 292-1, paragraph 3.1).
SIMATIC is part of the electrical equipment of a machine and must therefore be
included by the machine manufacturer in the declaration of conformity
procedure.
The EN 60204-1 standard (Safety of Machinery, Electrical Equipment of
Machines, Part 1, Specificationfor General Requirements) applies for electrical
equipment of machinery.
The table below is designed to help you with the declaration of conformity and
to show which criteria apply to SIMATIC according to EN 60204-1 (as of June
1993).
EN 60204-1 Subject/Criterion Remarks
Paragraph 4 General requirements Requirements are met if the devices
are mounted/installed in accordance
with the installation guidelines.
Observe the explanations on the
previous pages.
Paragraph 11.2 Digital I/O interfaces Requirements are met.
Paragraph 12.3 Programmable equipment Requirements are met if the devices
are installed in locked cabinets for
protection of memory contents against
change by unauthorized persons.
Paragraph 20.4 V oltage tests Requirements are met.
Introduction
EU Machinery
Directive
89/392/EEC
Electrical
Equipment of
Machinery in
Accordance with
EN 60204
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-13
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
B.4 Transport and Storage Conditions for Backup Batteries
Transport backup batteries where possible in their original packaging.
Observe the regulations for the transport of dangerous goods and substances.
The backup battery contains approximately 0.25 g of lithium.
Note: According to air freight transport regulations, the backup battery is in
Hazardous Goods Class 9.
Store backup batteries in a cool, dry place.
Backup batteries can be stored for up to five years.
!Warning
Backup batteries can ignite or explode and constitute a serious fire hazard if
they are heated or damaged.
Store batteries in a cool, dry place.
To prevent hazards when using backup batteries, you must observe the
following rules:
Do not
SRecharge
SHeat
SBurn
SDrill
SCrush
SShort-circuit
backup batteries.
Transport of
Backup Batteries
Storage of Backup
Batteries
Rules for Handling
and Using Backup
Batteries
Technical Specifications for the C7
B-14 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Technical Specifications for the C7
C-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Guidelines for Handling
Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices (ESD)
Section Description Page
C.1 What is ESD? C-2
C.2 Electrostatic Charging of Objects and Persons C-3
C.3 General Protective Measures against Electrostatic
Dischar ge Damage C-4
C.4 T aking Measurements and Working on ESD Modules C-6
C.5 Packing Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices C-6
Chapter
Overview
C
C-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C.1 What is ESD?
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or
components. Due to their design, these electronic components are very
sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge.
These Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the
abbreviation ESD.
Electrostatically-sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:
!Caution
Electrostatically-sensitive devices can be damaged by voltages that are far
below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These
voltages are present if you touch a component or module without previously
being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, damage caused by an
overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only
after a prolonged period of operation.
Definition
Guidelines for Handlin
g
Electrostaticall
y
-Sensitive Devices
(
ESD
)
C-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C.2 Electrostatic Charging of Objects and Persons
Any object with no conductive connection to the electrical potential of its
surroundings can be charged electrostatically. Small charges up to 100 V are
very common; these can, however, very quickly rise up to 15,000 V.
Examples:
SPlastic covers up to 5 000 V
SPlastic cups up to 5 000 V
SPlastic-bound books and notebooks up to 8 000 V
SDesoldering device with plastic parts up to 8 000 V
SWalking on plastic flooring up to 12 000 V
SSitting on a padded chair up to 15 000 V
SWalking on a carpet (synthetic) up to 15 000 V
An electrostatic discharge
Sof 3500 V and upwards can be felt
Sof 4500 V and upwards can be heard
Sof 5000 V and upwards can be seen.
Just a fraction of these voltages is capable of destroying or damaging your
electronic devices/components.
Carefully note and apply the protective measures described below to protect
and prolong the life of your modules and components.
Electrostatic
Charging
Limits for
Perceiving
Electrostatic
Discharges
Guidelines for Handlin
g
Electrostaticall
y
-Sensitive Devices
(
ESD
)
C-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C.3 General Protective Measures against Electrostatic Discharge
Damage
Keep plastics away from sensitive devices. Most plastic materials have a
tendency to build up electrostatic charges easily.
Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces, and packaging are
sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatically-sensitive devices. This
helps to avoid static charges.
If possible, avoid any contact with electrostatically-sensitive devices unless
absolutely necessary (for example, to work on them). Hold modules without
touching the pins of components or printed conductors. In this way, the
discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive components.
Note the following measures that have to be taken for modules that are not
protected against accidental contact:
STouch electrostatically-sensitive devices only
– if you wear a wristband complying with ESD specifications or
– if you wear special anti-static footwear or ground straps when walking
on an ESD floor.
SBefore working on electronic devices, discharge your body by touching
grounded metallic objects (for example, bare metal parts of cabinets,
water pipes etc.).
SProtect modules against contact with chargeable and highly insulating
materials such as plastic foils, insulating table tops, or synthetic clothing.
SPlace electrostatically-sensitive devices only on conductive surfaces:
– Tables with anti-static table top,
– Conductive ESD foam plastic (ESD plastic foam is mostly colored
black),
– ESD bags.
SAvoid placing electrostatically-sensitive devices in the immediate vicinity
of visual display units, monitors, or TV sets (minimum distance to
screen > 10 cm).
Keep Plastics
Away
Provide Sufficient
Grounding
Avoid Direct
Contact
Special
Precautions for
Modules without a
Casing
Guidelines for Handlin
g
Electrostaticall
y
-Sensitive Devices
(
ESD
)
C-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The following figure again illustrates the precautions for handling
electrostatically-sensitive devices.
a Conductive flooring material
b Table with conductive, grounded surface
c Anti-static shoes
d Anti-static coat
e Grounded ESD wristband
f Grounded connection of cabinet
g Grounded chair
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
ESD Precautions
Guidelines for Handlin
g
Electrostaticall
y
-Sensitive Devices
(
ESD
)
C-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
C.4 Taking Measurements and Working on ESD Modules
Measurements may be taken on electrostatically-sensitive devices only if:
SThe measuring device is grounded (for example, via protective conductor)
or
SThe tip of the isolated measuring device has previously been discharged
before use (for example, by briefly touching grounded metal parts).
C.5 Packing Electrostatically-Sensitive Devices
Always use conductive materials for packing modules without a casing and
components. You may also use metal-clad plastic boxes or metal containers.
Always store ESD modules in conductive packing material.
When packing modules incorporating batteries, cover the battery connections
with insulating tape or insulating material to avoid short-circuiting the
battery. Remove the battery if possible.
Use Grounded
Measuring Devices
Only
Using Conductive
Material for
Packing Modules
without a Casing
Cover Batteries
Guidelines for Handlin
g
Electrostaticall
y
-Sensitive Devices
(
ESD
)
D-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Literature on SIMATIC C7 and S7
/30/ Primer:
S7-300 Programmable Controller,
Quick Start
/70/ Manual:
S7-300 Programmable Controller,
Hardware and Installation
/71/ Reference Manual:
S7-300 and M7-300
Programmable Controllers,
Module Specifications
/72/ Instruction List:
S7-300 Programmable Controller
/230/ User Manual:
Standard Software for S7,
Converting S5 Programs
/232/ Manual:
Statement List (STL) for S7-300 and S7-400,
Programming
/233/ Manual:
Ladder Logic (LAD) for S7-300 and S7-400,
Programming
/235/ Reference Manual:
System Software for
S7-300 and S7-400,
System and Standard Functions
/236/ Manual:
Function Block Diagram (FBD) for S7-300 and S7-400,
Programming
/280/ Programming Manual:
System Software for M7-300 and M7-400,
Program Design
D
D-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Literature on SIMATIC C7 and S7
Glossary-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Glossary
Glossary-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
A
The analog I/O converts analog process values (for example, temperature)
into digital values that can be processed by the C7 CPU or converts digital
values into analog manipulated variables.
Assigning parameters means setting the behavior of a module.
B
The backup battery guarantees that the user program in the C7 CPU is stored
safe from power failures and that data areas, bit memory, timers, and
counters remain retentive.
The backup memory backs up memory areas of the CPU without the need for
a backup battery. The memory backs up a programmable number of timers,
counters, bit memory, and data block bytes.
A bus is a transfer medium that connects two or more nodes together. Data
transfer can be serial or parallel, via electrical conductors or fiber-optic
cables.
C
The C7 control system integrates a SIMATIC S7-300 CPU, a SIMATIC OP,
the possibility of connecting to the S7-300 I/O (for example, via an
integrated IM 360), and a communication connection (for example, ASi
master, PROFIBUS DP master/slave).
The C7 CPU is the central processing unit for the C7, complete with
processor, arithmetic unit, memory, operating system, and interfaces for
programming devices. The C7 CPU is independent of the ³ C7 OP. The
C7 CPU has its own MPI address and is connected to the C7 OP via the MPI
(multipoint interface).
The C7 OP handles the OP functions. It is independent of the ³ C7 CPU and
continues to operate, for example, if the C7 CPU goes into STOP mode. The
C7 OP has its own MPI address and is connected to the C7 CPU via the MPI
(multipoint interface). It is via the MPI that the C7 OP is connected to a
configuring computer (programming device/PC).
Analog I/O
Assigning
Parameters
Backup Battery
Backup Memory
Bus
C7
C7 CPU
C7 OP
Glossar
y
Glossary-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Communications processors are intelligent programmable modules with their
own processor. They form an important group within the components of a
programmable controller. A distinction can be made between various types of
communications processors according to their tasks. For example, CPs for
messages and logging, for point-to-point connection, for operator interfacing
(COROS), for bus connections (SINEC), for diagnostics, and mass storage
applications.
When a CPU starts up (for example, when the mode selector is moved from
STOP to RUN or when power is turned on), before cyclic program processing
starts (OB1), either the organization block OB101 (restart; only in the
S7-400) or OB100 (complete restart) is processed first. In a complete restart
the process-image input table is read in and the STEP 7 user program
processed starting with the first statement in OB1.
The configuration memory is a flash memory integrated in the C7 OP. It is
used for storing the configuration data.
Configuring is the selection and putting together of the individual
components of a programmable logic controller (PLC), and the installation of
the required software (for example, the operating system on an M7
automation computer) and adapting it to the specific task (such as assigning
parameters to the modules).
³ Communications processor
A cyclic interrupt is generated periodically by the CPU according to a time
interval which can be assigned parameters. It triggers execution of the
relevant organization block.
D
A collective term for system diagnostics, process error diagnostics, and
user-defined diagnostics.
The diagnostic buffer is a retentive area of memory within the CPU which
stores the diagnostic events in the order they occurred.
Diagnostic events include errors in a digital function in the C7, system faults
in the C7 caused, for example, by programming errors or operating mode
transitions.
Communications
Processor
Complete Restart
Configuration
Memory
Configuring
CP
Cyclic Interrupt
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Buffer
Diagnostic Event
Glossar
y
Glossary-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The diagnostic functions comprise the complete scope of system diagnostics,
process error diagnostics, and user-defined diagnostics, and the detection,
evaluation, and signaling of faults within the C7.
Modules with diagnostics capability signal system errors to the CPU by
means of diagnostic interrupts.
E
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the
bodies of electrical resources to the same or approximately the same
potential as foreign bodies in order to prevent interference or hazardous
voltages arising between the bodies.
The error display is one of the possible responses of the operating system to a
run-time error. The other possible responses are: error response in the user
program, CPU STOP mode.
F
FEPROMs correspond to the electrically erasable EEPROMs, but can be
erased much faster (FEPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only
Memory). They are used on the memory cards.
³ Flash EPROM
Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring the intended purpose of the
electrical resources. Function grounding has the effect of short-circuiting
interference voltages that would otherwise have an impermissible influence
on the resources.
A function module (FM) is a module which relieves the CPU in the S7-300
and S7-400 programmable logic controllers of time-critical and
memory-intensive process signal processing tasks. Function modules
generally use the internal communication bus for high-speed data exchange
with the CPU. Examples for function module applications are: counting,
positioning, closed-loop control.
Diagnostic
Functions
Diagnostic
Interrupt
Equipotential
Bonding
Error Display
Flash EPROM
Flash Memory
Functional Ground
Function Module
(FM)
Glossar
y
Glossary-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
G
Conductive ground whose electrical potential at any point can be taken as
zero. In the area of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential
other than zero. This is frequently referred to as the “reference ground.”
To connect an electrically conductive part with the grounding electrode (one
or more conductive parts that have very good contact to ground) by means of
a grounding point.
H
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as the result
of certain events in the process. The hardware interrupt is signaled to the C7
CPU. Depending on the priority of the interrupt, the corresponding
organization block is then executed.
I
The information functions of the STEP 7 programming software permit the
display of status information from the CPU (for example, information about
memory space or cycle time statistics).
SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes which control the
processing of the user program. These priority classes include interrupts, such
as hardware interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, the relevant organization
block is called automatically by the operating system in which the user can
program the required reaction to the interrupt (for example, in a function
block (FB)).
In isolated I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control circuit and the
load circuit are electrically isolated by, for example, optocouplers, relay
contactors, or transformers. Input/output circuits can be connected to
common potential.
Ground
Ground (Verb)
Hardware Interrupt
Information
Function
Interrupt
Isolated
Glossar
y
Glossary-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
L
The load memory is part of a programmable module. It contains objects
created by the programming device (load objects). It can be either a plug-in
memory card or an integrated memory. In SIMATIC M7 the load memory
can be defined as a directory on the hard disk.
M
A memory card is a memory submodule in credit-card format and in the form
of RAM or FEPROM for programmable modules and CPUs which can store
the user program and parameters.
The memory reset function deletes the following memories in the CPU:
SWork memory
SRead/write area of the load memory
SSystem memory
In S7/M7/C7 the MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are retained. In
M7 the operating system is also rebooted if the M7 was reset via the mode
selector. In SIMATIC HMI devices, all buffers are cleared. The MPI address
is reset to the default value.
³ Memory card
³ Multipoint interface
A network is the connection of a number of C7 and/or S7-300 and other
devices, such as a programming device, via a connecting cable. Data are
exchanged between the connected devices over the network.
The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programming device interface in
SIMATIC S7. It allows a number of programmable modules, text display
operator panels, and operator panels (OPs) to be accessed from a CPU. The
nodes on the MPI can communicate with each other.
Load Memory
Memory Card
Memory Reset
(MRES)
Memory
Submodule
MPI
MPI Network
Multipoint
Interface
Glossar
y
Glossary-7
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
N
The node number represents the “access address” of a CPU or a
programming device or other intelligent I/O module when it communicates
with other nodes via a network. The node number is assigned to the CPU or
the programming device using the “S7 Configuration” application.
In non-isolated I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control circuit
and the load circuit are electrically connected.
O
A collective term for all functions which, in conjunction with the hardware,
control and monitor the execution of the user programs, the distribution of
the operational equipment among the individual user programs, and the
maintenance of the operating mode (for example, MS-DOS).
P
1. A parameter is a variable in a STEP 7 logic block (see block parameter,
actual parameter, formal parameter).
2. A parameter is also a variable for setting the behavior of a module (one or
more per module).
Every programmable module has a basic parameter setting when it is shipped
from the factory, but this can be changed by configuring the hardware. There
are two types of parameters: static and dynamic parameters.
Dynamic parameters of modules, in contrast to static parameters, can be
changed by the user program during operation by calling an SFC in S7 and
by calling a function in M7, for example, limit values of an analog input
module.
Static parameters of modules, in contrast to dynamic parameters, cannot be
changed by the user program, but only by configuring the hardware, for
example, the input delay of a digital input module.
³ Programming device
³ Programmable logic controller
Node Number
Non-Isolated
Operating System
Parameter
Parameter,
Dynamic
Parameter, Static
PG
PLC
Glossar
y
Glossary-8 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the
CPU in a process image. There is a process-image input table (PII) and a
process-image output table (PIQ).
The process-image output table is transferred to the output modules by the
operating system at the end of the user program.
The process-image input table is read by the input modules before execution
of the user program by the operating system.
Programmable logic control is the automation technique using electronic
controllers whose function is stored in the control device as a program. The
structure and the wiring of the device are not therefore dependent on the
function of the controller. A programmable logic controller has the structure
of a computer; it consists of a CPU with memory, I/O modules, and internal
bus system. The I/O and the programming language are set up according to
the requirements of control engineering.
A programmable logic controller (PLC) comprises a central processor, a
CPU, and a number of I/O modules.
Programming devices are essentially personal computers that are compact
and portable and suitable for industrial use. They are characterized by being
equipped with special hardware and software for programming SIMATIC
programmable controllers.
R
The Random Access Memory or RAM is a read/write memory in which each
memory location can be addressed individually and have its contents
changed. RAM is used as a memory for data and programs.
The reference ground is the total of all connected conductive inactive parts of
an operating resource that cannot carry a hazardous touch voltage even in the
event of a fault.
Potential from which the voltages of the connected circuits are considered
and/or measured.
Process Image
Programmable
Logic Control
Programmable
Logic Controller
Programming
Device
RAM
Reference Ground
Reference
Potential
Glossar
y
Glossary-9
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
S
The scan cycle time is the time the CPU takes to run the user program once
through. The scan cycle time for analog modules is the time in which all the
channels (input and output channels) are converted and the next conversion
can start.
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the
programmable controller. There are digital input modules, output modules,
and in/out modules and analog input modules, output modules, and in/out
modules.
Programming software for creating user programs for SIMATIC S7
programmable controllers.
A STEP 7 application is a tool of STEP 7 which is tailored to a specific task.
Substitute values are values which are output to the process in the case of
faulty signal output modules or which are used in the user program instead of
a process variable in the case of faulty signal input modules. The substitute
values can be specified in advance by the user (for example, retain last
value). They are values which the outputs are to output when the CPU goes
into STOP.
System diagnostics comprises the detection, evaluation, and signaling of
errors which occur within the programmable controller. Examples of such
errors include: program errors or module faults.
The system memory is integrated in the S7 CPU in the form of RAM. The
address areas (for example, timers, counters, bit memory) and data areas
required internally by the operating system (for example, backup for
communication) are stored in the system memory. In M7, the system memory
is not a separate area but is integrated in the work memory.
T
The time-delay interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in SIMATIC
S7 program processing. It is generated when a timer has expired in the user
program. It triggers execution of the relevant organization block.
Scan Cycle Time
Signal Module
STEP 7
STEP 7
Application
Substitute Value
System
Diagnostics
System Memory
Time-Delay
Interrupt
Glossar
y
Glossary-10 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
The time-of-day interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in the
program processing of the C7 CPU. It is generated at a specific date (or
daily) and time (for example, at 9:50 or every hour or every minute). It
triggers execution of the relevant organization block.
Sum of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
Data transmission rate in bits per second (bps).
U
Without electrical connection to ground.
A diagnostic event recognized by the user which can be entered in the
diagnostic buffer (via SFC52).
Note: If the entry is prepared in the diagnostic buffer in clear text and sent, a
message appears.
The user memory contains the logic blocks and data blocks of the user
program. The user memory is either integrated in the CPU or in the form of
insertable memory cards or memory submodules. The user program is,
however, always executed from the internal RAM memory of the CPU.
The user program contains all the statements and declarations and the data
required for signal processing to control a plant or a process. The program is
linked to a programmable module (for example CPU or function module) and
can be structured in the form of smaller units (blocks).
V
Voltage-dependent resistor
W
The work memory is a random-access memory (RAM) in the CPU which the
processor accesses while executing the user program.
Time-of-Day
Interrupt
Total Current
Transmission Rate
Ungrounded
User-Defined
Diagnostic Event
User Memory
User Program
Varistor
Work Memory
Glossar
y
Index-1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Index
4-wire transducer
connection, 7-6
measuring ranges, 7-10
A
Accessories, 1-5
Acknowledgement, 4-5
area, 4-5, 4-6
bit, 4-5
Acknowledgement areas, size, 4-7
Actual value of counter, 8-14
calculating, 8-14
Additional information, 7-35, 8-12, 8-13
Addresses
analog function, 7-18
universal input, 8-6
Addressing, 6-9
Addressing recipes and data records, 4-20
Alarm acknowledgement, number, 4-4
Alarm message area, setting the bit, 4-4
Analog function, parameter, 7-21
Analog I/O, behavior, 7-33
Analog input
diagnostics, 10-4
isolated, 7-3
parameter , 7-22
Analog input function, 7-10
technical specifications, 7-14
Analog input module
characteristics, 7-11
technical specifications, 7-11
terminal connection diagram, 7-12
Analog input module SM 331; AI 8, wire break
check, 7-10
Analog inputs, measurement ranges, 7-10, 7-28
Analog inputs/outputs, 2-11
Analog output
diagnostics, 10-4
output ranges, 7-30
parameters, 7-25
Analog output function, 7-15
technical specifications, 7-17
terminal connection diagram, 7-16
Analog ranges
resolution, 7-27
sign conventions, 7-27
Analog signal, cable for, 7-3, 7-7
Analog-digital conversion, 7-31
Area pointer, screen number area, 4-12
Assigning parameters, universal inputs, 8-4
AUX digital inputs, 2-12
B
Backup battery
changing, 11-2
disposal, 11-3
service life, 11-3
storage, 11-3
transport and storage, B-13
Basic setting, parameter block, 7-22, 7-25
BATF, 3-7
Battery, backup, 11-2
Battery fault, 3-7
Bit number, 4-11
Bus connector, 2-16
C
C7 functions, 1-4
installing, 2-5
C7 accessories, 1-5
C7 CPU, 1-4, Glossary-2
C7 cutout, 2-6
C7 I/O diagnostics, 10-2
C7 I/O module, 1-7
C7 OP, 1-4, Glossary-2
C7 simulator module, 1-7
Cabinet installation, 2-20
Index-2 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Cable
for analog signals, 7-3, 7-7
Cables, 2-20
Category, system message, A-1
Causes, system message, A-2
CE marking, B-11
Change language, control job, 4-26
Channel-specific, diagnostic byte, 10-6
CI1, 8-7
CI2, 8-7
CI3, 8-7
Communication
MPI subnet, 5-3
PROFIBUS DP, 5-5
Communication functions, 5-2
Communication SFCs, non-configured S7
connections, 5-3
Communications processors (CP), 1-6
Configurable, events, 7-35
Configuration error, 7-22, 7-25
Configuration memory, Glossary-3
Connecting cable, PROFIBUS, 1-7
Connecting cable 368, 2-25
Connectors, 2-23
view, 2-13
Control and checkback bits, 4-15
Control job, 4-24
change language, 4-26
cursor positioning, 4-30
data record to CPU, 4-29
data record to OP, 4-29
delete alarm message buffer, 4-28
delete event message buffer, 4-28
display mode for alarm messages, 4-27
fetch acknowledgement area, 4-28
fetch alarm message bit area, 4-28
fetch event message bit area, 4-28
hardcopy, 4-25
interface parameters, 4-26
keyboard simulation, 4-30
menu selection, 4-28
message log on/off, 4-26
overflow warning on/off, 4-28
parameters, 4-25
partial screen updating, 4-29
password logout, 4-27
print alarm message buffer, 4-27
print all screens, 4-25
print event message buffer, 4-27
print recipe, 4-25, 4-29
print screen, 4-29
printer parameters, 4-27
screen selection, 4-29
select contents, 4-25
select recipe, 4-29
select special screens, 4-25
set contrast, 4-27
set date, 4-26
set password level, 4-27
set time, 4-26
SIMATIC S7, 4-17
structure, 4-24
transfer date/time, 4-28
Conversion, analog output, 7-32
Conversion time, analog input, 7-31
Count direction, setting, 8-10
Count inputs, parameter block, 8-10
Counter
start, 8-15
stop, 8-15
threshold frequency, 8-14
universal inputs, 8-14
Counter input
parameter , 8-9
universal inputs, 8-2, 8-4
Counting down, 8-14
Counting up, 8-14
Coupling identifier, 4-17
CPU operating mode, selecting, 3-4
CSA, B-10
Current measurement, 7-10
Current measurement range
analog input, 7-29
analog output, 7-30
Current transducer, 7-3
Cursor lock, 4-30
Cursor positioning, control job, 4-30
Cycle time
analog input, 7-31
analog output, 7-32
Cyclic interrupt bits, 4-15, 4-18
Cyclic interrupt times, 4-18
D
Data area
screen number area, 4-12
system keyboard image, 4-9
Data record
recipes, 4-19
transfer, 4-20
synchronization, 4-21
Index
Index-3
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Data record to CPU, control job, 4-29
Data record to OP, control job, 4-29
Data records, addressing, 4-20
Date, 4-15
Date and time, 4-17
Delete alarm message buffer, control job, 4-28
Delete event message buffer, control job, 4-28
DI/DO 24 VDC power supply, 2-12
DI/DO status display, 3-6, 6-8
Diagnostic
interrupt, 7-34
parameter assignment, 10-2
Diagnostic area, layout, 10-4
Diagnostic entry, channel-specific, 10-6
Diagnostic error
permanent, 10-3
temporary, 10-3
Diagnostic evaluation, 10-8
Diagnostic events, 10-2
Diagnostic messages
reaction, 10-9
read, 10-3
Diagnostics
analog input, 10-4
analog output, 10-4
C7 I/O, 10-2
enabling, 10-4
message, 7-34
parameter block, 7-22, 7-25, 10-4
Digital input, universal inputs, 8-2, 8-4
Digital input function, technical specifications,
6-4
Digital inputs, 2-9
universal inputs, 8-11
Digital output function, special features, 6-5
Digital outputs, 2-10, 6-5
Dimensions, labeling strips, 2-3
Display, contrast, 4-27
Display mode for alarm messages, control job,
4-27
Dynamic, parameters, 7-21
E
Enable diagnostic interrupt, 7-22, 7-25
Enabling, diagnostics, 10-4
Error handling, A-2
Error indicator, LEDs, 3-7
Errors, internal, A-2
EU Directive, Machinery, B-12
Event, assignable, 8-12
Event message area, setting the bit, 4-4
Events, configurable, 7-35
External gate counter, 8-22
F
Fetch acknowledgement area, control job, 4-28
Fetch alarm message bit area, control job, 4-28
Fetch event message bit area, control job, 4-28
File, labeling strips, 2-2
Flash EPROM, Glossary-4
Flash memory, Glossary-4
FM approval, B-10
FRCE, 3-7
Frequency calculation, 8-17
Frequency counter
parameter , 8-9
universal inputs, 8-2, 8-4
Function keyboard image, 4-10
Function keys, labeling, 2-2
Function modules (FM), 1-6
Functional ground, 2-14
Functions, C7, 1-4
G
Gate counter, external, 8-22
Gate time measurement, 8-22
Grounding, 2-20
Grounding bar, installing, 2-22
Grounding rail, 2-20
Group error, CPU, 3-7
Guidelines, for setup, 2-20
H
Hardcopy, control job, 4-25
Hardware interrupt, 8-12
events, 8-12
I
IM 360, 2-24
IM 361 cable, 2-16
Increments, 8-19
Input 24 VDC, 2-13
Input range, universal inputs, 8-7
Installation, interference-free, 2-20
Installation guidelines, 2-6
Installing C7, 2-5
Integrated interface module, 2-24
Index
Index-4 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Interface module, 1-6
Interface module IM 360, 2-24
Interface parameters, control job, 4-26
Interference signals, 2-20
Interference-free installation, 2-20
Internal errors, A-2
Interrupt, 7-22, 8-12
Interrupt cycle, 7-22, 7-31, 7-35
interrupt time, 7-22
parameter block, 7-22
Interrupt input, 8-2
universal inputs, 8-2, 8-4
Interrupt OB, 7-35, 8-12
Interrupt time, parameter block, 7-22
J
Job area, 4-17
K
Key assignment, function keyboard image, 4-10
Keyboard
C7-633, 3-2
C7-634, 3-3
group bit
function keyboard, 4-10
system keyboard image, 4-9
variations, 3-2
Keyboard simulation, control job, 4-30
Keying connectors, 2-23
Keyswitch, 3-2
L
Labeling, function keys, 2-2
Labeling strips, 2-2
changing, 2-4
cutting, 2-2
dimensions, 2-3
making, 2-2
template, 2-2
Labeling template, function keys, 2-2
LED
assignment, 4-11
states, 4-11
LED assignment, bit number, 4-11
LED image, 4-11
LEDs, 3-7
List, system messages, A-1
Lock, cursor, 4-30
Lower threshold, period time, 8-21
M
Machinery Directive, SIMATIC, B-12
Measured value resolution, 7-28
Measurement
parameter block, 7-22
type of, 7-22
Measurement period, frequency calculation,
8-17
Measurement ranges, 7-27
analog inputs, 7-10, 7-28
Memory reset, MRES, 3-5
Menu selection, control job, 4-28
Message, triggering, 4-4
Message areas, 4-4
Message bit, 4-4
Message level, display number area, 4-12
Message log on/off, control job, 4-26
Message number, 4-4, A-1
Mode selector switch, 3-2
MPI interface, connector assignment, 2-15
MPI network, connecting programming device,
2-17, 2-18
MPI subnet, communication, 5-3
MRES, 3-5
N
Non-configured S7 connections, 5-3
O
OB 40, 7-35
OB40, 8-12
OP operation mode, 4-16
OP startup, 4-16
Operating mode, selecting, 3-4
Operator panel (OP), 1-7
Output range
addresses, 8-8
parameter block, 7-25
universal inputs, 8-8
Output ranges, 7-27
analog output, 7-30
Overflow warning on/off, control job, 4-28
Index
Index-5
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
P
Parameter
analog function, 7-21
analog input, 7-22
analog output, 7-25
Parameter assignment, universal inputs, 8-9
Parameter assignment error, 7-22, 7-25
Parameter block
basic setting, 7-22, 7-25
count inputs, 8-10
diagnostics, 7-22, 7-25, 10-4
interrupt cycle, 7-22
measurement, 7-22
output range, 7-25
substitute value, 7-25
Parameter characteristics
analog inputs, 7-24
analog output, 7-26
Parameter tools, universal inputs, 8-9
Partial screen updating, control job, 4-29
Password logout, control job, 4-27
Period, 8-19
Period duration counter, universal inputs, 8-2,
8-4
Period time, lower threshold, 8-21
Period time counter, 8-19
parameter , 8-9
parameter assignment, 8-21
Period time measurement, 8-19
Permanent, diagnostic error, 10-3
Plug and socket connectors, view, 2-9
Print alarm message buffer, control job, 4-27
Print all screens, control job, 4-25
Print event message buffer, control job, 4-27
Print recipe, control job, 4-25, 4-29
Print screen, control job, 4-29
Printer, 1-7
Printer cable, 1-5
Printer parameters, control job, 4-27
Printing, labeling strips, 2-2
PROFIBUS, connecting cable, 1-7
PROFIBUS bus cable, 2-16
PROFIBUS bus terminal, 2-16
PROFIBUS-DP, communication, 5-5
PROFIBUS-DP interface, connector
assignment, 2-15
Programming device, 1-8
connecting for maintenance, 2-19
connecting to MPI, 2-17, 2-18
for service purposes, 2-19
in MPI network, 2-18
Programming device cable, 2-16
MPI, 1-7
TTY, 1-7
Programming the counters, example, 8-23
R
Range overshoot, 7-22
Range undershoot, 7-22
Reaction, to diagnostic messages, 10-9
Ready bit, 4-16
Recipe, addressing, 4-20
Recipes, 4-19
overview, 4-19
transferring data records, 4-19, 4-20
Relatively constant frequencies, resolution, 8-18
Remedies, system message, A-2
Replacing, labeling strips, 2-4
Resolution, analog ranges, 7-27
Response time, analog output, 7-32
RS 232/TTY interface, 2-14
RS 485 repeater, 1-8
RUN, 3-5, 3-7
RUN-P, 3-5
S
S7-300 (CPU), 1-6
S7-400 (CPU), 1-6
Screen number area, 4-12
Screen selection, control job, 4-29
Select contents, control job, 4-25
Select count, edge, 8-10
Select recipe, control job, 4-29
Select special screens, control job, 4-25
Set contrast, control job, 4-27
Set date, control job, 4-26
Set password level, control job, 4-27
Set time, control job, 4-26
Settling time, analog output, 7-32
Index
Index-6 C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
SF, 3-7
Shielding, 2-20
Shielding clips, 2-22
SHIFT keys, 4-8
Sign conventions, analog ranges, 7-27
Signal modules (SM), 1-6
SIMATIC S7
alarm messages, 4-4
control jobs, 4-17
date and time, 4-15
event messages, 4-4
function keyboard image, 4-10
images, 4-8
LED image, 4-11
recipes, 4-19
screen number area, 4-12
system keyboard image, 4-9
transferring data records, 4-20
user version, 4-13
SIMATIC S7 connection, cyclic interrupt bits,
4-15
SIMATIC S7 coupling
control and checkback bits, 4-15
coupling identifier, 4-17
date and time, 4-17
job area, 4-17
OP operating mode, 4-16
OP startup, 4-16
ready bit, 4-16
SIMATIC TOP Connect, 1-7
Size, labeling strips, 2-3
SLIDE633.DOC, file, 2-2
SLIDE634.DOC, file, 2-2
Slot number, 8-20
Spare parts, 1-5
Special screens, screen number area, 4-12
Start counter, 8-15
State, universal input, 8-7
Static, parameter, 7-21
Status display, DI/DO, 3-6, 6-8
Status indicator, LEDs, 3-7
STOP, 3-5, 3-8
Stop counters, 8-15
Storing, backup battery, 11-3
Substitute value, parameter block, 7-25
System keyboard image, 4-9
System messages, list of, A-1
T
Template, labeling strips, 2-2
Temporary, diagnostic error, 10-3
Threshold frequency
counter, 8-14
exceeding, 8-14, 8-18
Time, 4-15
Time interrupt, 7-35
Transducer
isolated, 7-4
non-isolated, 7-5
Transfer, data records, 4-20, 4-21
Transfer date/time, control job, 4-28
Type of measurement, 7-22
U
UL, B-10
Universal input, addresses, 8-6
Universal inputs
assigning parameters, 8-4
counter, 8-14
parameter assignment, 8-9
pin assignments, 8-4
technical specifications, 8-5
Update time, 4-23
Upper threshold, period time, 8-21
User data area, optimization, 4-23
User data areas, functionality, 4-3
User version, 4-13
V
Variations, keyboard, 3-2
Voltage measurement, 7-10
Voltage measurement range
analog input, 7-29
analog output, 7-30
Voltage transducer, 7-3
connection, 7-6
W
Wire break, 7-22
Wire break check, analog input module SM 331;
AI 8, 7-10
Index
1
C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
$
Siemens AG
A&D AS E 81
Oestliche Rheinbrueckenstr. 50
D-76181 Karlsruhe
Federal Republic of Germany
Please check any industry that applies to you:
rAutomotive
rChemical
rElectrical Machinery
rFood
rInstrument and Control
rNonelectrical Machinery
rPetrochemical
rPharmaceutical
rPlastic
rPulp and Paper
rTextiles
rTransportation
rOther ___________
From:
Your Name: _____________________________
Your Title: _____________________________
Company Name: __________________________
Street: __________________________
City, Zip Code__________________________
Country: __________________________
Phone: __________________________
2C7-633/C7-634 Control Systems
C79000-G7076-C634-01
Additional comments:
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents meet your requirements?
2. Is the information you need easy to find?
3. Is the text easy to understand?
4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
